P. 1
Apol Lo

Apol Lo

|Views: 406|Likes:
Published by Anton Lukin

More info:

Published by: Anton Lukin on Sep 15, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

06/26/2014

pdf

text

original

APOLLO

0051

Service Manual
Version 17 July 2006 (Rev. 4)

APOLLO

0051

Service Manual
This Manual belongs to Apollo equipment serial No. …………………… Version 17 July 2006 (Rev. 4)

SERVICE MANUAL Revision history

Revision history
Rev. 0 1 Date 14.01.05 29.03.05 Page/s 6-2, 6-14, 6-44, 17-5, from 22-129 to 22-145 Modification description Document approval. A14 Control desk CPU PCB layout and wiring diagram update. Parameter 74 update in Inverter setting. Description of basement grubs regulation.
(Ref. RDM 6040, RDM 6078, RDM 6092)

2

27.04.05

4-6, 4-11, 6-44, 7-1, 8-1, 8-3, 9-2, 11-10, 11-13, 11-16, 11-25, 11-26, 13-6, 13-10, da 22-9 a 22-45, 22-49, da 22-69 a 22-77, da 22-81 a 22-95

Change of min and max height of compressor cone with respect to table top. Release of SW Version 1.03 (correcting some minor bugs and introducing some improvements). Wiring diagrams and Drawings update.
(Ref. RDM 6008, RDM 6103, RDM 6104)

3

14.04.06

All

Release of "All Digital" version. Release of "C-CSA-US" version. Release flat tabletop version. Software parameters updating. Release of SW version 1.05 (HOLD function active message on the display, collimator additional filter function, Table Top double height possibilities from floor). Wiring diagrams and Drawings update. Spare Parts chapter added.
(Ref. RDM 6292, RDM 6340, RDM 6360)

4

17.07.06

from 4-2 to 4-6, 4-8, 8-1, 11-14, 11-16, 11-21, 11-25, 11-37, 11-42, 14-4, 18-3, 20-3, 22-3, from 22-9 to 22-45, 22-49, from 22-81 to 22-95, 22-129, 22-131, from 22-155 to 22-159, 23-6

Release of SW version 1.06 on cabinet CPU board and SW version 1.04 on console CPU board (4 Tomo speed, SID and Layers displayed in inch, compression force displayed in lbs, 43x35 cassette division 4:1). Additional Collimator Filters board A16 (optional) added. Table Top Control board A17 added.
(Rif. RDM 6414, RDM 6467)

(Rev. 4)

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Revision history

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

(Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL Contents

Contents
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 1.2

1-1

Symbols used in this manual .............................................................. 1-1 How to contact VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI technical service ................ 1-2

2

SAFETY ASPECTS
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

2-1

Warnings ............................................................................................. 2-2 Radioprotection warnings .................................................................... 2-5 Environmental risks and disposal........................................................ 2-8 Used symbols ...................................................................................... 2-9

3

DESCRIPTION
3.1
3.1.1 3.1.2

3-1

ID labels .............................................................................................. 3-1
ID labels "CE" version.......................................................................3-2 ID labels "CE" plus "C-CSA-US" version ............................................3-3

3.2

Description .......................................................................................... 3-4

4

TECHNICAL DATA
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5

4-1

Technical features ............................................................................... 4-1 Formats division table in centimeters .................................................. 4-8 Formats division table in inches .......................................................... 4-9 Standards and regulations................................................................. 4-10 Dimensions ....................................................................................... 4-11

5

PRE-INSTALLATION
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4

5-1

Space requirements ............................................................................. 5-3 Electrical provisions ............................................................................ 5-6 Adaptation to the mains voltage........................................................... 5-7 Environmental conditions.................................................................... 5-7

6

INSTALLATION
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5

6-1

Base positioning with beam and column.............................................. 6-2 Assembly of the Tube support arm ...................................................... 6-5 Spot Film Device assembly .................................................................. 6-6 Left- and right-hand tabletop support arm assembly ......................... 6-10 Machine cable connection.................................................................. 6-12

(Rev. 3)

i

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Contents

6.6

Image intensifier installation.............................................................. 6-23
6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 9-12” fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation.................................. 6-24 16" fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation (Toshiba model) ............ 6-26 Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation....................................... 6-28 6.6.3.1 9” with lift Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation ................. 6-29 6.6.3.2 12” Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation ............... 6-31 6.6.3.3 16” Image Intensifier (I.I.) with lift installation ............... 6-33

6.7 6.8 6.9

Installation of the Tube - Collimator group......................................... 6-35 Mounting the covers .......................................................................... 6-39 Tabletop assembly ............................................................................. 6-45
6.9.1 6.9.2 Curved tabletop assembly .............................................................. 6-45 Flat tabletop assembly ................................................................... 6-47

6.10 Final verifications .............................................................................. 6-49

7

THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF THE TABLE
7.1
7.1.1 7.1.2

7-1

Functioning sequences ........................................................................ 7-3
Powering up and initialisation sequence ........................................... 7-3 Activation sequence for a movement ................................................. 7-4 Generation of a condition alarm ....................................................... 7-6 Generation of a operating alarm ....................................................... 7-6 Generation of an alarm caused by the power circuit.......................... 7-7

7.2

Fault Conditions .................................................................................. 7-6
7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3

8

IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION
8.1 8.2

8-1

Output signals from the Apollo table.................................................... 8-1 Input signals towards the Apollo table ................................................. 8-3

9 10

CONFIGURATION ACCESS AND DESCRIPTION OF THE DATA GROUPS ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP 100 DATA
10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 10.1.4

9-1 10-1

10.1 Potmeter adjustment ......................................................................... 10-4
Cell data and list............................................................................ 10-5 ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 – 102) ...................... 10-8 SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 – 104)................................... 10-9 MAIN BEAM and MIDDLE BEAM potmeter adjustment (cells 105 ÷ 108)........................................................................... 10-10 10.1.5 TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment (cells 111 – 112) 10-14 10.1.6 SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment (cells 113 – 114) ........................................................................... 10-15 10.1.7 WIDTH COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 117 – 118) ........ 10-16 10.1.8 HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 119 – 120)...... 10-17 10.1.9 IRIS COLLIMATOR (optional accessory) potmeter adjustment (cells 121 – 122) ........................................................................... 10-18 10.1.10 COMPRESSION FORCE potmeter adjustment (cells 123 – 124) ..... 10-19
APOLLO

ii

(Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL Contents

10.1.11 GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 – 126) ................................. 10-20 10.1.12 CASSETTE CLOSE potmeter adjustment (cells 127 – 128) ............. 10-21 10.1.12.1 CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment ............... 10-22 10.1.13 CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 – 130) ........ 10-24 10.1.14 SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cells 131 – 132) .......................... 10-25 10.1.15 I.I. lift microswitches adjustment (Optional) (cell 133) ................... 10-26

11

ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION OF ALL GROUPS (EXCEPT GROUP 100)
11.1.1 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4

11-1

11.1 Group 200 – Installation data ............................................................ 11-3
Function of the parameters of group 200 ........................................ 11-3 Theory of functioning of an axis with PID control .......................... 11-17 Motors check data function .......................................................... 11-21 Range of runs carried out by movements with potmeter feedback .. 11-24 Equipment mechanical dimensions............................................... 11-27 Data relative to single fault potmeter controls ............................... 11-31 Spot Film Device cassette and shutters run .................................. 11-35 11.3.4.1 Calculation of the cassette run.................................... 11-36 11.3.4.2 Calculation of the shutters run ................................... 11-41 Safety aspects for PDI-controlled movements ................................ 11-43

11.2 Group 300 – PDI controlled motor data............................................ 11-17

11.3 Group 400 / 500 / 600 – Dimensions and runs .............................. 11-24

11.3.5

11.4 Position 701 – EEprom copy ............................................................ 11-45 11.5 Position 711 – Clock settings and reset alarm memory .................... 11-46 11.6 Position 721 – Test Spot Film Device and table life .......................... 11-47
11.6.1 11.6.2 Spot Film Device test.................................................................... 11-48 Table test ..................................................................................... 11-50

11.7 Position 731 – Remote service function ............................................ 11-52 11.8 Position 751 – Alarms memory......................................................... 11-53 11.9 Position 850 – Table cycles memory ................................................. 11-61

12 13

SINGLE FAULT OPERATING LOGIC FUNCTIONALITY
13.1.1 13.1.2

12-1 13-1

13.1 Collision ............................................................................................ 13-1
Anticollision barrier........................................................................ 13-5 Anti entrapment device................................................................... 13-6

13.2 Compressor ....................................................................................... 13-7 13.3 Collimator.......................................................................................... 13-8 13.4 Table automatic positioning............................................................. 13-11

(Rev. 3)

iii

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Contents

14

OPERATING MODE
14.1.1 14.1.2 14.2.1 14.2.2

14-1

14.1 Spot Film Device ................................................................................ 14-1
"Standard radiography" performance block diagram........................ 14-2 "Rapid sequence" block diagram ..................................................... 14-3 "Standard tomography" block diagram............................................ 14-5 "Sequential tomography" block diagram.......................................... 14-6

14.2 Standard tomographic ....................................................................... 14-4

14.3 Direct................................................................................................. 14-7 14.4 Digital ................................................................................................ 14-8
14.4.1 14.5.1 14.5.2 14.6.1 "Digital radiography" block diagram................................................ 14-9 "Digital tomography" block diagram .............................................. 14-11 "Digital tomography" block diagram .............................................. 14-12 "Stepping angio" block diagram .................................................... 14-14

14.5 Digital Tomography.......................................................................... 14-10

14.6 Angiographic.................................................................................... 14-13

15 16

EMERGENCY END RUN HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT
16.1.1 16.1.2

15-1 16-1

16.1 A3 output PCB................................................................................... 16-1
Collimator axle speed adjustment ................................................... 16-1 Adjustment of collimator axle torque gain (armature reaction) ......... 16-3

16.2 Compressor PCB................................................................................ 16-4

17

THREE-PHASE INVERTER

17-1

17.1 Inverter input/output functions......................................................... 17-2 17.2 Inverter hardware setting................................................................... 17-3 17.3 Inverter software parameters setting .................................................. 17-3
17.3.1 17.3.2 Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali ................. 17-4 Parameters that maintain the default settings................................. 17-6

17.4 Access to parameters for writing ........................................................ 17-7 17.5 Procedure for restoring the default parameters .................................. 17-8

18 19

FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS PCB LEDS CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC EXPOSURE RESULTS
19.1.1 19.1.2 19.1.3 19.2.1

18-1 19-1

19.1 Spot Film Device adjustment ............................................................. 19-1
Checking the longitudinal positioning of the cassette ...................... 19-2 Checking the transversal positioning of the cassette ....................... 19-3 Checking the positioning of the shutters......................................... 19-3 Alignment of the X-ray beam with collimator diaphragm ................. 19-4

19.2 Centering the collimator, checking the X-ray field.............................. 19-4 19.3 Alignment of X-ray beam with light beam .......................................... 19-6 19.4 Collimator adjustment ....................................................................... 19-8
APOLLO

iv

(Rev. 3)

.... transmitted.......1 20. 20-41 Collimator ............ 3) v APOLLO ................... 20-3 20..........2 Maintenance that can be carried out by the Authorised Technician .... 20-39 20..............................1 Troubleshooting for displayed diagnoses....................... 21-2 21....................................................................2..2.................... 20-44 21 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING 21-1 21................. 20-39 Spot Film Device (not available on “All Digital” version) .......................... transcribed or translated without the prior written consent of Villa Sistemi Medicali..........................3 Table.........2 Troubleshooting for faults or malfunctions not recognised by the processor .......SERVICE MANUAL Contents 20 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING 20-1 20. This manual is the English translation of the Italian original manual version...............................1 Maintenance the operator can carry out .......2................... 22-2 23 SPARE PARTS 23-1 No part of this publication may be reproduced.................................. 21-3 22 WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS 22-1 22..........1 List of wiring diagrams and drawings ........................ (Rev...................2 20..

SERVICE MANUAL Contents THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO vi (Rev. 3) .

SERVICE MANUAL Introduction 1 INTRODUCTION G NOTE: This manual has been updated to reflect the state of the product with which it is sold. because of its connected accessories. (Rev. Apollo is an electromedical equipment and. it can be used solely under the supervision of a physician or of highly qualified personnel with the necessary competence in matter of protection from X-rays. The equipment must be used in accordance with the procedures contained in the manual and shall never be used for other purposes than those provided by the manual itself.1 Symbols used in this manual G Indicates a “NOTE”. to provide a proper reference while troubleshooting and repair operations. 3) 1-1 APOLLO . The user is responsible for the fulfilment of the legal requirements regulating the installation and the functioning of the equipment itself. are being performed. 1. The remote controlled table Apollo is an X-ray equipment that allows to perform general X-ray examinations. as such. commonly carried out by the service engineer. Indicates a “WARNING”. topics identified by this symbol refer to the patient and/or operator safety aspects. The manual might not reflect variations to the product if they do not affect how it works. The present manual provides the user with instructions for a safe and efficient use of the equipment. the equipment is an optimal solution for examinations where the use of contrast liquids is required. please pay particular attention when reading the topics identified by such symbol. In particular.

com APOLLO 1-2 (Rev.2 How to contact VILLA SISTEMI MEDICALI technical service For any technical queries please contact the following: • • • Telephone number +39 02 488591 Fax number +39 02 48859222 E-mail: service_support@villasm.SERVICE MANUAL Introduction 1. 3) .

• Only Villa Sistemi Medicali authorised personnel can provide technical assistance for the equipment. Villa Sistemi Medicali does not take any responsibility for: • • the use of Apollo equipment different from the one it was originally designed for damages to the equipment. it provides all necessary information for an appropriate use and warnings about the dangers associated with X-ray generators. Only authorised personnel may remove the protections of the electrical cabinet and of the equipment. to the patient caused by both wrong installation and maintenance not in conformity with the procedures contained in the equipment's user and maintenance manuals. 3) 2-1 APOLLO . moreover. must be applied in order to avoid damage to the equipment or to people.SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects 2 SAFETY ASPECTS WARNING: All information contained in the present chapter must be carefully read and. (Rev. Villa Sistemi Medicali designs and manufactures equipment in compliance with safety requirements. and access the parts under tension and the moving parts. and by incorrect operating techniques mechanical and/or electrical modifications performed during or after installation. to the operator. where provided.

the operator MUST ALWAYS PAY CLOSE ATTENTION when a movement is activated. If possible. During the motorised movements. They are a valid instrument for the operator in addition to the intrinsic safety devices of the equipment. no objects interfering with the movements should be in proximity of the table. oxygen or nitrous oxide.1 Warnings Apollo is suited for use in hospital. Speeds. APOLLO 2-2 (Rev. These buttons will immediately stop any movement and function. In order to prevent risks of short-circuit and corrosion. The latter two may only be used at the distances from any element of the equipment reported in the following page. from walkie-talkies and cellular phones. Before activating motorised parts. ensure that the patient is correctly positioned and that their legs and arms are positioned within the shape of the tabletop. or the angulation. Nevertheless. such as the tilting. the equipment must be installed at a certain distance from the electrical energy transformation cabins. Before cleaning the equipment. avoid the infiltration of water of other liquids in the equipment. therefore the line connection may not be carried out in buildings with domestic-type power supply lines. the tabletop. starts and stops of these movements are controlled and managed by the equipment's logic. positions. from static uninterruptible power supplies. use the support handgrips. anaesthetic mixtures inflammable when in contact with air. Safety aspects are fundamental in this logic in order to ensure the maximum safety both for the patient and the operator. always ensure it is disconnected from the line. All movements are controlled by a powerful and sophisticated electronic microprocessor system. Although Apollo was designed with a high degree of protection from electromagnetic interference. Press the EMERGENCY red buttons located on the control console and on the front side of the equipment in case of danger. 3) .SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects 2. Pay close attention to people in the X-ray room. The equipment was not designed to be used in the presence of vapours.

Apollo can be connected to a power supply line different from the domestic line. 3) 2-3 APOLLO . Apollo is suited for use in the following electromagnetic environment: Electromagnetic emissions Irradiated and conducted emissions CISPR 11 Conformity A class EMC usage environment Apollo can be connected to a power supply line different from the domestic line. Apollo can be connected to a power supply line different from the domestic line. (Rev. The Spot Film Device will be initialised and.SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects R. Apollo generates Radio Frequency energy only for internal functioning.3 1 3 8 30 Instruments or systems used in close proximity to Apollo must be in compliance with the Electromagnetic Compatibility regulations. in case the cassette is loaded. The generated R. with known scarce immunity to electromagnetic fields.84 feet) from Apollo and must be powered through a dedicated electric line.F. As a consequence. that may cause damage to the patient become inhibited. level does not cause interference with the electrical devices used nearby. Apollo can be connected to a power supply line different from the domestic line. the examination in progress may be cancelled. the tabletop and scan movements. source power 10 mW 100 mW 1W 10 W 100 W Distance (m) 0. on the display a warning will ask the operator to remove it before proceeding. Group I Emitted harmonic EN 61000-3-2 Flicker EN 61000-3-3 tension/emission fluctuations EN 60601-1-2 immunity (EN 61000-4-2 /3 /4 /5 /6 /8 /11) Complying Complying Complying In case of line voltage dips that last longer than what can be sustained by the table electronic control system. as well as the angulation. Noncompliant instruments. must be installed at a distance of at least 3 mt (9.F.

disinfect the parts that may come into contact with the patient by following the procedures provided in the chapter 21.SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects Apollo cannot be installed in operating theatres. Clean and. when necessary. Apollo must be powered off when using the electrosurgery cutter or similar devices. 3) . APOLLO 2-4 (Rev.

2 Radioprotection warnings Villa Sistemi Medicali designs and manufactures equipment in compliance with safety requirements. only the patient is allowed to stay in the room. During X-ray examinations.I.9").SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects 2. Spot Film Device. it provides all necessary information and warnings about the dangers associated with equipment connected to X-ray generators. tube group has an excursion of 1600 mm (62.7") occupation area as specified by the applied regulations. because the I. must stay in the areas indicated in the figures below. The personnel in the room. moreover. front view G NOTE: The front view shows a 600x600x2000 mm (23. 3) 2-5 APOLLO . Such area takes into account the above-mentioned excursion. during the examination in progress. The personnel authorised to perform X-ray examinations must observe all regulations regarding the protection against ionizing radiation as reported below: • • Use dedicated protections (leaded clothing) to protect the patient from X-rays diffused in the areas adjacent to the one to be X-rayed. 8 7 6 5 4 3 Occupation area (see Figure 2-2) 2 1 Figure 2-1: Horizontal table.6"x23. (Rev.6"x78. In reality. if required by the examination. the total occupation zone is the one showed in Figure 2-2. may also be present only if wearing radioprotective clothing. Medical and paramedic personnel or specifically authorised personnel.

7") H = 2000 mm (78. 3) .6"x93.7") Figure 2-2: Horizontal table.SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects Occupation area 600x2380 mm (23. front view APOLLO 2-6 (Rev.1") Figure 2-3: Vertical table. plan view Occupation area (see Figure 2-4) G F E D C B A 1400 mm (55.

6") 1000 mm (39.9 mGy/h 13.8") 600 mm (23.5 mGy/h (Rev.4") 1200 mm (47.1 mGy/h 3. 3) 2-7 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects 450 mm (17. Figure 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Ref.1") 1600 mm (63.9") 2000 mm (78.1 mGy/h 1.9") Dosage 0. Such values have been detected as reported in the safety regulation IEC 601-1-3 and. plan view The maximum values of the radiation diffused in the indicated areas are reported in the following table. 3 mA continuative emission.1 mGy/h 4.0") 1800 mm (70.1") 1600 mm (63.2") 1400 mm (55.6") H = 1700 mm (66.5 mGy/h 13.9") Figure 2-4: Vertical table.3 mGy/h 4. in particular.4 mGy/h 4.0") 1700 mm (66.06 mGy/h 0.9 mGy/h 3.8") 600 mm (23.7") Occupation area 600x600 mm (23.2") 1400 mm (55.4") 1200 mm (47.7") 350 mm (13.6 mGy/h 6. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H from the ground 350 mm (13.4 mGy/h 9.2 mGy/h 1.75 mGy/h 10.6"x23.09 mGy/h 2. for technique factors of 120 kV.6") 1000 mm (39.

must be disposed of at the recycling centres appointed by the Local Health Units.SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects 2. APOLLO 2-8 (Rev. In particular. non-biodegradable plastics. copper. aluminium. 3) .3 Environmental risks and disposal Some of Apollo components contain material and liquid that. at the end of the equipment life-cycle. copper. aluminium Motor: iron. the equipment contains the following materials and/or components: • • • “Reducers”: lubricating oil. hard plastic material casings Electric cabinet: iron. vetronite for printed circuits. steel.

3) 2-9 APOLLO . at the end of the equipment life-cycle.4 Used symbols Symbol Description Equipment with Type B applied parts Some components contain material and liquid that. must be disposed of at the recycling centres appointed by the Local Health Units ∼ N R S T Alternating current Neutral conductor connection point Three-phase line conductors connection point Ground-fault protection Warning: consult the accompanying documentation Dangerous voltage (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects 2.

SERVICE MANUAL Safety aspects THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 2-10 (Rev. 3) .

SERVICE MANUAL Description 3 3. 3) 3-1 APOLLO .1 DESCRIPTION ID labels 7 3 4 5 2 1b (Rev.

3) .SERVICE MANUAL Description 3.1 ID labels "CE" version 1a Apollo features label (located on the electric cabinet) 1b Apollo ID label (located on the equipment) 2 Spot Film Device features label 3 Collimator features label 4 "Total Filtration" label 5 "Mechanical moving parts" label 6 "Connect TV chain only" label (inside the electric cabinet) 7 Compression coupling ID label APOLLO 3-2 (Rev.1.

3) 3-3 APOLLO .1.2 ID labels "CE" plus "C-CSA-US" version 1a Apollo features label (located on the electric cabinet) 1b Apollo ID label (located on the equipment) 1c C-CSA-US certification plate (located on the electric cabinet) 2 Spot Film Device features label 3 Collimator features label 4 "Total Filtration" label 5 "Mechanical moving parts" label 6 "Connect TV chain only" label (inside the electric cabinet) 7 Compression coupling ID label (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Description 3.

2 Description The remote controlled Apollo table is the latest development of remote controlled tables produced by Villa Sistemi Medicali. Movements and complex functions are controlled by the remote-control console located in the protected X-ray area. entrance distance in the "All Digital" version • carbon fibre or plastic tabletop. is equipped with a Spot Film Device that permits the use of commonly used cassettes of any type. In particular: • the mechanical construction • the cassette's loading/unloading inside the SFD • the removal of components' numerous supporting frames. with slight curvature or flat surface and integrated accessories holder profiles • reduced I. are grouped in a single electric cabinet. The Apollo table.-film distance to avoid the parallax correction • reduced-dimension console with new functional concepts. The format division program is very complete and is described in another paragraph. so that the components become "self-supporting". Apollo table is available in the traditional configuration with a Spot Film Device or in the "All Digital" version. The main table movements are replicated on the control panel on the side of the table. The fundamental functional concepts of the Apollo table are: • smallest possible space occupied • patient coverage simply through the longitudinal movement of the U arc • elevating tabletop with parts rotation system as opposed to sliding system • modern. 3) . except for the console.SERVICE MANUAL Description 3. concept winning appearance and design • operator's rear access without barriers towards the patient • reduced skin-to-film distance or skin-to-I.I.I. The most recent features applied to this type of table have been incorporated and further improved. which also houses the control modules for the system accessories. in its traditional configuration. APOLLO 3-4 (Rev. All electric and electronic control and logic elements. where the Spot Film Device is not present and the table necessarily has to be completed by Digital Image acquisition system.

This allows to raise the input surface of the I. the II is located closer to table top. those usually coming with the equipment. closer to the patient when the cassette is not in the exposure position. The following table lists all the accessories and divides them as standard.I. The "All Digital" version is equipped always with an iris type collimator. consequently I. myelographies. lift is not available in this configuration. All movement controls are of "dead man" type. and optional accessories. Apollo is available with both standard and optional accessories. The collimator can be of square-rectangular collimation type or iris type. urographies. of the cranium. As an option. controlled by a central logic. bronchography. and of the skeleton. Apollo was designed and built in compliance with European directives for obtaining the CE mark as specified in the European Directive 93/42 for Medical Devices. The intensifier is fixed by default by docking it to the Spot Film Device or to an equivalent support in the "All Digital" version. built to satisfy all needs. which has circular field collimation in addition to square rectangular collimation. To meet the requirements of fluoroscopic modality and image acquisition by means of digital systems. Apollo is a universal table for radiological diagnosis. which must be specifically requested when ordering the equipment. sets the limits for the irradiated area. (Rev. by means of an upper mount anchor plate. vascular and lungs examinations. it can also be used for angiographies.SERVICE MANUAL Description An automatic collimator. guaranteeing the highest safety for both the operator and the patient. It can be employed for the examination of the digestive tract.I. In "All Digital" version. When fitted with a digital acquisition system.e. the table is setup to accept image intensifiers from a minimum of 9" (nominal) maximum input field up to a maximum of 16" (nominal). a device called "elevating I. i. The ID code of the equipment varies according to the type of collimator and to the voltage.I." is available. 3) 3-5 APOLLO .

SERVICE MANUAL Description Ref. A B C D E F Description Block patient footrest Headrest Patient support handgrip (N. 2 pieces) Band-tensioner with compression band Lateral cassette holder Type of accessory Standard Standard Standard Optional Optional Optional B C A F E D Figure 3-1: Curved Tabletop accessories B A C F D E Figure 3-2: Flat Tabletop accessories All accessories are easily applied as they are mounted directly on the tabletop's profile. 2 pieces) Leg support (N. 3) . APOLLO 3-6 (Rev.

0 Ω @ 415-480 Vac ±10% < 2 % @ 380-400 Vac ±10% < 2 % @ 415-480 Vac ±10% (Rev.1 TECHNICAL DATA Technical features General features Type of equipment Manufacturer Type of equipment and classification in compliance with IEC 60601-1 standard regulation Grade of protection in compliance with IEC 60529 standard regulation Operating mode Use Apollo Villa Sistemi Medicali S. 3) 4-1 APOLLO . 20090 Buccinasco (MI) Italy class I with Type B applied parts equipment non protected against penetration of liquids continuous functioning equipment not suitable for use in presence of inflammable anaesthetic mixtures Electric features Available voltage Frequency Maximum current Fuses on safety isolating transformer Equipment protection Power Line impedance Load voltage drop 3N~ 380-400 Vac ±10% 3N~ 415-480 Vac ±10% 50-60 Hz 7 A @ 380-400 Vac ±10% 6 A @ 415-480 Vac ±10% 8 AT @ 380-400 Vac 7 AT @ 415-480 Vac 8 A with magnetothermic 6 kVA < 1.A.p.0 Ω @ 380-400 Vac ±10% < 1.SERVICE MANUAL Technical data 4 4.

I.6") with 12" I.2") 618 mm 618 mm 655 mm 735 mm Minimum flat tabletop height from the ground (with Spot Film Device) EDGE 668 mm (26.I. 775 mm (35.6") APOLLO 4-2 (Rev.3") 668 mm (26.8") (28.3") (28.4") with 16" I.I.I.3") 4960 mm (195. Minimum flat tabletop height from the ground (All Digital version) minimum with 9" I. 713 mm with 16" I.3") (24.3") – curved tabletop 203 mm (7.I.6") with 9" I.4") 3180 mm (125.I.3") 668 mm (26. 600 mm (23.I.I.3") (24.6") 2420 mm (95.I.I.3") 705 mm (27.1") 717 mm (28. 793 mm minimum with 9" I. with 12" I.8") – flat tabletop 185 mm (7.I.I. with 16" I.I. CENTRE 600 mm (23.SERVICE MANUAL Technical data Mechanical features Weight Height vertical table Height horizontal table and max SID Width from the front end of the Spot Film Device to the rear end of the main beam Total width completely retracted Length (horizontal table) Total length with +90 /-90 max SID Setup for I.3") (25.1") – curved tabletop 1418 mm (55.6") 637 mm (25.3") 763 mm (30.6") 1920 mm (75.9") – flat tabletop 117 mm (4. 695 mm (27.9") Minimum curved tabletop height from the ground (All Digital version) Max height tabletop centre from the ground Distance tabletop centre – upper side beam Distance upper tabletop edge – upper side beam 1400 mm (55.1") (31.2") 1590 mm (62. with 12" I.0") minimum 618 mm with 9" I.9") (24.I.2") (24.7") 785 mm (30.0") 843 mm (33. I.2") EDGE 668 mm (26. 4) . 618 mm with 12" I. max size Minimum curved tabletop height from the ground (with Spot Film Device) 895 Kg (1973 lbs) – SFD version 830 kg (1830 lbs) – All Digital 2500 mm (98.6") 600 mm (23. with 16" I.3") standard fixed mount optional lift 16 inch CENTRE minimum 600 mm (23.

5") 765 mm (30.4" – 59.5") fixed 320 mm (12.9"/sec) (adjustable) with speeding step for small or wide movements 25 mm/sec (1"/sec) ± 10% (fixed) 11.1") 605 mm (23.6") 1600 mm (62.90° 800 mm (31.5 °/sec fast 6.1 lbs) Source-to-film distance Angulation Compressor I.2 °/sec (adjustable) 25 mm/sec (1"/sec) (adjustable) 40 mm/sec (1.8") + 180° / .I.4" x 21.40° 250 mm (9. lift Speed Tilting Lift Transversal tabletop Scan slow 4. 4) 4-3 APOLLO .8") 284 kg (626. lift (optional) (Rev.2"/sec) to 200 mm/sec (7.6"/sec) ± 20% (fixed) + 90° / .1500 mm (39.1") + 40° / .90° 38 mm (1. including the TV-chain control or the digital module Max patient weight with all movements Runs Tilting Lift Longitudinal tabletop Transversal tabletop Scan Source-to-film distance Angulation Compressor (cone run in X-ray field) Tube rotation I.SERVICE MANUAL Technical data Mechanical features Distance rear side beam – internal tabletop edge (with centered tabletop) Distance rear side beam – internal tabletop edge (with internal tabletop end run) Electric cabinet containing all electric and electronics controls.I.9") 1000 .6" x 76.5 °/sec (adjustable) 25 mm/sec (1"/sec) (adjustable) 50 mm/sec (2"/sec) ± 10% (fixed) from 30 mm/sec (1.8") 520 x 550 x 1950 mm (20.

SERVICE MANUAL Technical data Features data and measures Distance X-ray field centre / table head extremity Distance X-ray field centre / table feet extremity Skin-to-film distance Film-to-fixed I. (SFD versions) Skin-to-I.4") 65 mm (2.2" x 25. distance Skin-to-I.I.1 lbs) with 0.I. lift completely lowered Skin-to-I.5 kg (1.3") for curved tabletop 102 mm (4.I.7 mm Al < 0.8") for flat tabletop policarbonate carbon fibre with Rohacell filler < 0.3 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.7") for flat tabletop 84 mm (3.5 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.2" x 21.2") for flat tabletop 388 mm (15. 4) Radio-transparent area size Standard material Optional material (for curved tabletop only) Filtration for standard model Filtration for carbon fibre model (for curved tabletop only) Accessories holder guides Surface APOLLO .I.7") (without parallax correct. lift completely lifted 390 mm (15.5"-3.0") for flat tabletop choice of 45-65 mm (1.6") for curved tabletop 2214 x 554 mm (87.3") for curved tabletop 383 mm (15.0") for flat tabletop 26 mm (1.I.0") for flat tabletop 2214 x 650 mm (87.7" x 29.1 lbs) step Minimum distance compressor cone – tabletop Max distance compressor cone – tabletop Compression force Tabletop Size 2379 x 750 mm (93.3") for curved tabletop 102 mm (4.) 84 mm (3.I. (All Digital versions) Skin-to-I.3") for flat tabletop 19 mm (0.0") for curved tabletop 44 mm (1.5") for curved tabletop 2356 x 738 mm (92.6") for curved tabletop 83 mm (3.4") for curved tabletop 133 mm (5.1") for flat tabletop from 3 kg (6.I. distance with fixed I.4") 390 mm (15.6 lbs) to 15 kg (33. distance with I. distance with fixed I.7"-2.5") for curved tabletop choice of 63-83 mm (2.7 mm Al integrated smooth with curvature smooth flat 4-4 (Rev.I.3") for flat tabletop 138 mm (5.I.7" x 29. distance with I.

8 sec ≤ 1.I.8" x 21.6") ca with cushions and shaped shoulder stoppers integrated ergonomic with winder adjustable adjustable for lateral projections Spot Film Device (NOT present on All Digital version) Accepted cassette sizes Divisions on a line Crossed divisions Spot Film Device movement Operating mode Minimum fluoro-to-exposure switching time Maximum fluoro-to-exposure switching time Average speed in rapid sequence Leaded shutters Grid Head I.2 sec 2 im/sec integrated vibrating.7" x 23.6") ca with shoulder stoppers ergonomic with winder adjustable adjustable for lateral projections support surface 400 x 600 mm (15.SERVICE MANUAL Technical data Accessories for curved tabletop Footrest (standard) Headrest and shoulder rest (standard) Handgrips (standard) Compression band (optional) Legs support (optional) Lateral cassette holder (optional) Accessories for flat tabletop Footrest (standard) Headrest and shoulder rest (standard) Handgrips (standard) Compression band (optional) Legs support (optional) Lateral cassette holder (optional) support surface 300 x 550 mm (11. parkable pre-set pre-set (Rev. fixing AEC from 13x18 (5"x7") to 35x43 (14"x17") from 1 to 4 in 4 and in 6 with feed belts without tray standard program and rapid sequence 0. 4) 4-5 APOLLO .

9 30° 2.8 1.7 mm Al Total filtration iris collimator 1.0 0.0 3.4 0.0 2.3 45° 4.8") with 1 mm (0.4 °/sec (adjustable) 7° .5 0.3 1.7 mm Al Tomography Type Layer max height Layer increment Layer automatic increment Speed Angles Tomography exposure times (sec) semiarc / plane with electronic algorithm 350 mm (13.4 2. 4) .2 – 22.0 1.45° 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Grades speed speed speed speed 7° 0.04") step selectable with automatic increment depending on the tomo angle 11.0 from right to left or vice versa (adjustable) sequential program with forward and back exposures until divisions are completed with continuous layer automatic increment and return to the vertical position at the end of each exposure without stops tomography is allowed for variable scan positions depending on the selected angle and layer Direction Sequential tomography Scan movement range APOLLO 4-6 (Rev.6 0. square and iris Additional filtration (optional) for both with additional filters movement models (2 mm Al / 1 Al + 0.6 2.3 20° 1.5 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.39 inch2) X-ray field coverage @ 1 m > 43 cm2 (17 inch2) Stray radiation ≤ 45 mR/h @ 150 kVp 350W Total filtration rectangular collimator 0.0 mm Al eq @ 100 kVp SEV 2.2 mm Cu) manual or motorized – automatic Limitation – manual: by means of joystick on console and buttons on collimator Operating mode – automatic with / without Hold mode – manual Light for centering with timed 100W lamp (min 160 lux @ 1 m) or with on-demand switching off Minimum dimension X-ray field @ 1m < 1 cm2 (0.20° .6 1.SERVICE MANUAL Technical data Collimator 2 axis collimator rectangular and square 3 axis collimator rectangular.30° .1 mm Cu / 1 Al + 0.

SERVICE MANUAL Technical data Stepping angio (optional) Modality Automatic only with digital acquisition system – – step length: depending on the selected I. 3) 4-7 APOLLO . manual: adjustable with 1 mm step Direction Interface Controls Console movements Console functions User interface Controls type Safety on movements Environmental conditions Operating conditions selectable integrated with digital generator and scan controls with joystick on table side with buttons controls with graphic display.I. function keys and LED signalling "Dead man" single fault on the HW chain driving movement and feedback Temperature: Humidity: Pressure: Temperature: Humidity: Pressure: from +10 to +40° from 30 to 75 % from 700 to 1060 hPa from -20 to +70° ≤ 95% non condensing > 630 hPa Conditions for transport and storage (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Technical data 4. The measure indicated on the various divisions is nominal.2 Formats division table in centimeters 13x18 18x13 18x24 9x24 9x12 24x18 12x18 24x24 12x24 12x12 24x30 12x30 30x24 15x24 15x12 10x24 10x12 30x30 15x30 10x30 18x43 43x18 21x18 14x18 15x40 40x15 20x15 13x15 10x15 20x40 10x40 40x20 20x20 13x20 10x20 30x35 15x35 10x35 35x30 17x30 12x30 30x40 15x40 10x40 40x30 20x30 13x30 10x30 35x35 17x35 12x35 35x43 17x43 12x43 43x35 21x35 14x35 11x35 G APOLLO NOTE: The first number of the format refers to the tabletop transversal direction (patient right-to-left). 4) . 4-8 (Rev.

3x7 11x14 5.SERVICE MANUAL Technical data 4.5x14 5.7x17 17x14 8.7x7 4. The measure indicated on the various divisions is nominal.7x14 G NOTE: The first number of the format refers to the tabletop transversal direction (patient right-to-left).5 4.5x7 5.3 Formats division table in inches 5x7 7x5 8x10 4x10 4x5 10x8 5x8 10x12 5x12 12x10 6x10 6x5 4x10 4x5 9.7x14 14x17 7x17 4. (Rev.7x14 14x11 7x11 4.5x11 14x14 7x14 4.5 7x17 17x7 8.5x14 3.7x9.7x11 3. 3) 4-9 APOLLO .5x9.5 3x9.

SERVICE MANUAL Technical data 4. Sub Chapter J CAN/CSA C22. APOLLO 4-10 (Rev. General requirements for safety UL Std No 60601-1 (2nd edition) Safety of Medical Electrical Equipment. Part 1.5) Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 2: Particular requirements for the safety of associated equipment of X-ray equipment. knowable by the identification code with last digit "1" (ex 9784xxxxx1).2 No 60601-1-M90 Safety of Medical Electrical Equipment. 0051 The EC symbol certifies the conformity of Apollo to Directive 93/42/EEC. General requirements for safety. 3) . also with as indicated below: CFR 21 Code Federal Regulation.4 Standards and regulations Apollo was designed and built in compliance with the following regulations: IEC/EN 60601-1 Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 1: General requirements for safety 1: collateral standard: safety requirements for Medical Electrical Systems IEC/EN 60601-1-2 Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 1: General requirements for safety 2: collateral standard: electromagnetic compatibility – requirements and test IEC/EN 60601-1-3 Medical Electrical Equipment – Part 1: General requirements for safety collateral standard: general requirements for radiation protection in diagnostic X-ray equipment IEC/EN 60601-2-32 (with exclusion of clause 22. more than above listed standards. Part 1. Versions C-CSA-US. are produced in compliance.4.

5") with IB 12” min. 600mm (23.8") – max 2680mm (105. 1975mm (77.5") – max 1400mm (55.1") with IB 12” min. 2055mm (80. 3) 4-11 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Technical data 4.5 Dimensions A: with IB 9” min. 695mm (27.5") with IB 16” min.8") – max 2680mm (105.5") Figure 4-1 (Rev.6") – max 1400mm (55.1") B: with IB 9” min. 1880mm (74.4") – max 1400mm (55.1") with IB 16” min.9") – max 2680mm (105. 775mm (30.

3) .SERVICE MANUAL Technical data THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 4-12 (Rev.

so that the top surface of the plate is flush with the floor. 3) 5-1 APOLLO . The standard floor fixing plate (Figure 5-1) is suitable for slabs with a bearing capacity of more than 2400kg/m2 (499lbs/feet2) (weight of machine fitted with 16" IB and considering a patient of 150kg / 330. Figure 5-1: Standard floor fixing plate (Rev. The concrete surface of the slab.SERVICE MANUAL Pre-installation 5 PRE-INSTALLATION The instructions on the following pages guarantee that the installation performed will ensure the remote-controlled Apollo table will work properly.16feet2). Position the plate and carefully level it so that the surface obtained is as level as possible. under the plate.5lbs on a support surface of 0.7lbs = 1160kg / 2557.5.g. The Manufacturer can provide any technical consultancy and assistance necessary right from the pre-installation stage (if requested. The room should be prepared for the installation of the Apollo table according to the choice of the most suitable floor plate (Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2).5"x51. to check the positioning of the equipment inside the X-ray room). remove the surplus and let it dry for six hours. Remove the surface of the floor in an area measuring 420x1310 mm (16. pour the concrete with a cement/sand ratio of 1:2.6") until you reach the concrete of the slab. G NOTE: The "All Digital" version is only slightly lighter than the Spot Film Device version so it’s not convenient to differentiate the calculation of the bearing capacity needed for installation. The plate already has threaded holes and M16 bolts for the anchorage of the base. by inserting the fixing bolts) so that they are not blocked up during installation.48m2 / 5. must be rough enough to ensure the concrete to be poured adheres properly. these holes must be protected (e.

a weight distribution plate is available and must be requested at the time of the order (purchase code 5584902500 Figure 5-2). 3) . In the first case (1) follow the instructions given above for a plate of a smaller size and be sure to remove the upper surface of the floor over an area of 2700x1600 mm (106. Figure 5-2: Weight distribution plate This plate can be installed on the floor in two different ways: 1. Fixed to the floor. G NOTE: The weight distribution plate is not symmetrical. In the second case (2). the plate must be fixed to the floor taking advantage of the relative fixing holes and masked through the construction of raised section that covers the structure of the plate itself. Sunk into the floor 2. APOLLO 5-2 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Pre-installation If the bearing capacity of the slab is not sufficient (less than 2400 kg/m2 / 499 lbs/feet2).3"x63"). so it’s important to position it in the correct way (Figure 5-2).

on the sides leave room as detailed in Figure 5-5. (Rev. doors ecc.1 Space requirements G NOTE: In order to unload the main body of the device from the truck. When performing the overview of the location (installation room.4").4"). 3) 5-3 APOLLO . Figure 5-3 The minimum height of the installation room must be greater than 2550 mm (100. aisles. operating room on the front is advised to be 1000 mm (39.) please remind that the main body of the device after having removed the wood box has dimensions given in Figure 5-3.SERVICE MANUAL Pre-installation 5. it is necessary either that the truck has an elevating lift or to use an elevating fork cart.

• D: suggested section: 10 cm (3.9"x3.53 feet).SERVICE MANUAL Pre-installation Under floor conducts (Figure 5-4) must meet the following requirements: • C: suggested section: 20x10 cm (7.5") The minimum distance with cabinets in position B (outside the Apollo tilting area) = 600 mm (23.9") / max distance between the pit and the cabinet: 9 m (29. WARNING: The electrical cabinet is fitted with two wheels so that the rear can be more easily accessed during installation and maintenance. 3) .6") Figure 5-4: Minimum dimensions necessary for Apollo installation without any limit on table movements APOLLO 5-4 (Rev.9") / max distance between the cabinet and the control panel 14 m (45.93 feet). (*) The minimum distance with cabinets in position A (inside the Apollo tilting area) = 800 mm (31. G NOTE: If distances are larger than those indicated above (C and D) ask adequate length of connecting cables at order.

SERVICE MANUAL Pre-installation Figure 5-5: Minimum dimensions necessary for Apollo installation with Chest Stand without any limit on table movements (Rev. 3) 5-5 APOLLO .

it might jeopardise the safety of the operator and/or cause the malfunctioning of the electronic equipment. If the grounding of the equipment is not good enough.0 mm².g.2 Electrical provisions • POWER SUPPLY • FREQUENCY • ABSORBED POWER (table only) • ABSORBED CURRENT (table only) • APPARENT LINE RESISTANCE 380-400Vac 3 phase +Ground 415-480Vac 3 phase +Ground 50-60Hz 5kVA 7A < 1Ω G NOTE: Generally the power required for the fitting out of one complete X-ray room including the Apollo table equals 25-30kVA. • Connection directly to the mains: Make provision for an automatic switch with fuse as per the current regulations in the country of installation. APOLLO 5-6 (Rev. • Connection to the generator: Check the generator manual to make sure that the connection points are right for the load and insulation values. The general grounding must respond to the standards in force.SERVICE MANUAL Pre-installation 5. when the generator is powered down. the image capturing system or chest stand) are turned off as well. 3) . the table and the accessories connected to it (e. a preferable alternative because. WARNING: The equipment can be connected directly to the mains or in cascade with the ray generator. In both cases the wires of the three-phase power supply must have a crosssection of at least 4.

3 Adaptation to the mains voltage The insulation and power feed transformer (T1) of the Apollo table is fitted with two sets of (R S T) primary winding power supply terminals. make sure that the mains voltage corresponds with the predisposition of the equipment by checking that: • the rating plate shows the right voltage (the position of the rating plate is described in paragraph 3. the other 400V.1 must be complied with for the environmental operating and transport/storage conditions.1) • the primary main power supply insulation transformer T1 connection corresponds with the mains voltage. 5. Before powering up the equipment.SERVICE MANUAL Pre-installation 5.4 Environmental conditions The data in paragraph 4. This pre-disposition must be specified on ordering and will be incorporated in the factory before shipment. 3) 5-7 APOLLO . One group is for connecting the 380V power supply. The equipment can be supplied with provision for a 380V or 400V connection. (Rev.

3) .SERVICE MANUAL Pre-installation THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 5-8 (Rev.

handling and assembly purposes. the machine is broken down into units that must be put together: Base with beam and column (Assembly 1) Tube and collimator support arm (Assembly 2) Spot Film Device (Assembly 3) Left. support frame assy. make sure the power supply is cut off by means of a switch before accessing any of the parts that can be a danger. (Rev. support frame has mechanical characteristics equal to the SFD one. For delivery. the safety regulations in force must be respected and the precautions described below must be taken: • wear accident prevention clothing (boots. For "All Digital" versions.and right-hand tabletop support arm (Assembly 4) Tabletop (Assembly 5) v v v v v Assemble the units by following the instructions below. grid and shutters are not present.I. gloves. 3) 6-1 APOLLO .I. This I. • when the unit is ready to be powered up and while the installation is in the final phases of completion. all instructions relevant to SFD must be intended to the I. G NOTE: The instructions present on this chapter are referred to a standard unit versions (with Spot Film Device).SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6 INSTALLATION WARNING: During the mechanical installation of the equipment and the electrical connection described below. goggles when necessary) • always work in conditions of utmost safety and avoid carrying out procedures that put you or others at risk • make sure that no electricity is supplied to the equipment unless the installation is completed or said electricity is required for installation purposes. but any devices for cassettes.

WARNING: Before positioning the assembly on the anchorage plate.5). G NOTE: The operations described below require the use of a transpallet. Remove bolts "D" and "E" holding the base assembly to the pallets. 3) . from the pallet.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. 3.1 Base positioning with beam and column The base assembly with beam and column are shipped in a crate as shown in Figure 6-1. Remove lid "A" and walls "B" of the crate. 2. check that this is flat with respect to both axes. these grubs may be used in the final stages of installation to correct possible elastic deformations of the basement when the table is loaded (see paragraph 6. Do not use the grubs positioned on the left side of the basement to achieve horizontal alignment of the table. 1. Remove the wooden beams "C" holding the pallets together. A B B D E B C C D B Figure 6-1 APOLLO 6-2 (Rev.

in such a way that it is parallel to the long side of the base and subsequently allows the transpallet to be inserted to lift the group. Lower the transpallet. Lower the transpallet. Main beam “C” Figure 6-2 6. raise the base assembly and remove the central pallet "E". Position the transpallet under one of the 2 side pallets "D". Exert leverage on the shoulder and lift the base assembly enough to remove the central pallet "C" and reposition it under the base. remove the transpallet and position it on the side of the base assembly. inserting one of the two main beams "C" parallel to the transpallet fork. Referring to Figure 6-2. Rest one side of the base on two supports (e. 3) 6-3 APOLLO . Referring to Figure 6-3. Main beam “C” Figure 6-3 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 4. suspend the other side.g. 5. the pallets positioned on the corner) leaving the centre part free. allowing the side of the base to protrude as much as possible. insert the transpallet centrally under the base assembly and lift it to free the two side pallets "D".

Check that the holes in the base assembly line up perfectly with those in the anchorage plate. This operation could damage the actuators. 2 grubs are present to adjust the base position in order to avoid interferences during trendelenbourg movement. 9. Unlock the 2 grubs and fix the base on the floor plate. slide the transpallet in completely under the base. Take the base assembly to the fixing plate and try to align the base-plate fixing holes as well as possible. 10. positioning the transpallet perpendicularly to the base assembly. At this moment only it is allowed to remove the transport wood frame and lateral iron plate for main beam. Leaving the transpallet in its present position.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 7. 12. If it is necessary. Position the two main wood beams "C" at the side of the base. APOLLO 6-4 (Rev. between middle beam and plastic guides present on the base. slide it under the base in such a way that it is possible to lift the assembly and free the two supports. suspend the base assembly on the central main beam "C". 8. The grubs adjustment is explained on paragraph 6. to move the base assembly to align the fixing holes. Bring the base assembly into the room and follow the above procedure in reverse. raise the base assembly enough to remove one of the wooden beams.5 . Exerting leverage on one of the two side iron brackets. With the greatest of care. Repeat the operation to remove the remaining wooden beam. items from 10 to 15. parallel to the transpallet forks. use the transpallet. 11. G NOTE: Moving the base while it is resting on the ground by applying leverage to the structure is not advised under any circumstances. Lower the base assembly and remove the transpallet. 3) . Gently lower the base assembly until it is resting on the ground. Close the two fixing holes on head side.

4. 3) 6-5 APOLLO . position the front plate in such a way that the nine fixing holes on the parts to assemble (front plate – tube support arm column section) are aligned (Figure 6-4).SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. Move the tube support arm towards the top of the column and. Position on the frontal part of the X-ray tube arm the microswitch for 0° position setting it in such a way that it is not activated when the X-ray tube rotation pin reaches position 0°. Column section Tube support arm Front plate Micro 0° Figure 6-4 (Rev. 3. at the same time. Remove the front plate from the column stand. Make sure that the tube support arm is aligned properly with the column before tightening the fixing screws. 2.2 Assembly of the Tube support arm 1.

This must be assembled with the four Spot Film Device support wheels and it will constitute a tool necessary for the installation of the Image Intensifier (paragraph 6. Free the four Spot Film Device supports from the safety blocks fixing them to the transport pallet. Remove the Spot Film Device from the pallet being careful to pay the utmost attention not to damage it. 2. Remove all screws fixing the Spot Film Device. Position the Spot Film Device assembly mounted on the transport pallet. 4. 1. Safety rod Protection of the inclination potmeter Safety rod Figure 6-5 APOLLO 6-6 (Rev. The Spot Film Device is fitted on the relevant adjustable supports and fitted with wheels to make it easier to move and position. 3) . Remove the two top hooks from the Spot Film Device (one per side) (Figure 6-6) so that positioning can be carried out. the two safety rods holding the inclination motor support on the end wall and remove the protection of the inclination potmeter (Figure 6-5). near the machine.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6.3 Spot Film Device assembly WARNING: A plate is provided with the Spot Film Device. 3.6).

Position the Spot Film Device assembly near the end wall and make sure that it is possible to align the fixing holes on the shoulders and on the inclination motor support. 7. If it is necessary to make an adjustment to obtain perfect right angles between the Spot Film Device and the end wall. use the adjustable supports while being careful to avoid forcing the Spot Film Device on the angulation motor's fusion attachment (Figure 6-6). and then tighten the twenty-two fastening screws. 6. one on each side. adjust the adjustable supports of the Spot Film Device support until the position required is reached (Figure 6-6). the Spot Film Device assembly with the twenty-two bolts supplied (eleven bolts per side). Remount the two top hooks removed at point "4" above. Remove the four Spot Film Device assembly adjustable supports. If it is necessary to lift or lower the Spot Film Device to align the fastening holes. 3) 6-7 APOLLO . without tightening. Once the alignment of the holes on both the fixing shoulders has been checked. it is possible to fix.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 5. it must be at right angles to the end wall where it is fixed. Insert the two centering pins into their holes (Figure 6-6). (Rev. taking care that the threaded part can be accessed from outside. Centering pin 90° Top hook Figure 6-6 8. Check that the two elements are at right angles to each other using a bubble level. If the Spot Film Device is imagined as a plane.

E. Connector/Cable X101 X68 X44 X19 X14 X16 Ground cable Nr 8 A.C. The following table is an aid in the identification of the cables and where they must be connected (see also Figure 6-7).C. Carry out the Spot Film Device wiring pre-arranged on the right-hand side of the end wall. The wiring must be routed using the relevant cable clips to be found on the right-hand wall of the Spot Film Device.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 9.E. interfacing with the flat cable (X16) installed in the factory. fixed to an anchoring plate. must be placed on the right-hand wall of the Spot Film Device. 3) . The wires must be routed in such a way that they are parallel to and not on top of each other (Figure 6-7). The X16 wire. chamber cable X68 X14 X19 X44 X101 X16 Cable clip Ground cable Figure 6-7 APOLLO 6-8 (Rev. chamber cable Point of connection Spot Film Device PCB A10 Spot Film Device PCB A10 Spot Film Device PCB A10 Spot Film Device PCB A10 Spot Film Device PCB A10 Interface connector X16 A10 PCB fixing plate A.

X16 Figure 6-8 (Rev. 10. shut the panel and do up the bolts on both sides (Figure 6-8). Connect the free end of the flat cable (X16) to the PCB of the key pad fitted on the machine A8.C. Position the front panel of the Spot Film Device and fix it with the hinge on the left-hand wall.E. chamber cable is only present when the automatic exposimeter chamber is fitted to the Spot Film Device.SERVICE MANUAL Installation G NOTE: The automatic exposimeter device is an optional and consequently the A. Loosen the fixing screws of the hinge on the Spot Film Device's lefthand wall. 3) 6-9 APOLLO .

Remove the small plate from the beams.4 Left. Belt aligment reference Arm belt Coordination belt Outside support Small plate Beam side protection Figure 6-9 APOLLO 6-10 (Rev. the relative belts have been tensioned and before mounting the tabletop and moving the arms. Place the arm into its seat in such a way as to allow the assembly of the belt on the relative pulleys. otherwise correct the position of the belt of the arm. For this reason there are two labels indicating the lefthand and right-hand arms. 2. following the route indicated in the figure. Check that the phasing reference lines marked above the belts of the arm and the co-ordinator correspond. 5. Remove these blocks only after the arms have been assembled.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. Remove the beam side protection used for transport purposes.and right-hand tabletop support arm assembly The tabletop support arms are different from each other with regard to the table fixing pin position and the reference lines for fixing the respective belts. G NOTE: Both the table top support arms are fitted with blocking bolts for the transport. Position the arm in such a way as to be able screw up the small plate removed at point "2" using the three bolts. 3. At this point the belt is properly tensioned. Loosen the three external attachment fixing bolts. Right-hand arm assembly (Figure 6-9): 1. 3) . 4.

7.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. Remove the blocking bolts used to immobilise the arm during transport. For the assembly of the left-hand arm proceed as for the assembly of the right-hand arm. 3) 6-11 APOLLO . Do up all the six arm blocking bolts. (Rev.

A B Figure 6-10 1. When you decide also to connect the system wires it is advisable to refer to paragraph 6. Take care to note when opening the chains the location of the individual covers. all have to be wired up to the machine as described below. As these are not all the same.7 for tube-collimator group installation. How to proceed in this regard is a matter for the installer's own discretion. APOLLO 6-12 (Rev. etc. they will have to be put back properly when the chains are closed. Fix the "B" chain to the upper locking bracket.).5 Machine cable connection The machine is partially factory wired. while the rest of the wires are provided separately. anode.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. or the system wires can also be connected (high tension cables. At this stage only the machine wires can be set up so as to permit powering the table and to make the remaining installation process stage easier. 3) . G NOTE: The wire chains "A" and "B" (Figure 6-10) are made in such as way that they can be opened to permit the wires to be inserted.

.100. check as follow: on the external side of the link the code number is present.I. chain "B" should be positioned as in Figure 6-11. 8.optional) to the ground bar (W2) in the base unit (Figure 6-13). It is advisable at this stage not to close the wiring chain but just to install some covers so as to secure the wires inside them.100. X77. X75. The end must be fixed on lower bracket has all links with code 157. X88. X97 and X98 to the A11 base connector board (Figure 6-12).1. Connect wires X20. A B C Figure 6-11 5. The shorter ones should be connected to the A11 base connector board and the longer ones in the table's electrical cabinet and that of the generator if you wish also to connect up the system cables. 3. threading them through "C" (Figure 6-11). Before you start. The end must be fixed on upper bracket is with 1 link code 157. Connect ground cable 10 between the ground connection W2 on the machine base unit and the ground rod (W1) in the cabinet. 3) 6-13 APOLLO .150. X96.SERVICE MANUAL Installation G NOTE: To easily identify the end to fix to the upper bracket.100. 4. 7. 2. The base connector board has a dust guard that has to be removed when connecting the wires and then replaced. 9 and 11 (lift I. Some of these wires are much shorter than others.150. To avoid cable-braiding. Connect ground cables 5. X46. (Rev. is suggested to position the cable chain as showed in Figure 6-10.1.150.1 and the following with code 158. House the group of cables leaving chain "A" in chain "B".

3) .7kΩ between pins X45-16 and X45-32. X99. X19. E3. E2. Connect the ground cable to the rod (W1) in the cabinet.7kΩ between pins X4519 e X45-33 and a resistor of 4.1. Connect the console cable (X8) to the cabinet. – optional). X16. 7. In order to do so proceed as follows: 10. X106 (lift I. X101. Act on the regulation grubs to correct deformations of the side wall of the basement: the process is of the trial and error type. otherwise will be not necessary other adjustments. X74. X105 and X45 as indicated in the following table (see also Figure 6-13). i.) APOLLO 6-14 (Rev. Connect all the output cables in "C" and from chain "B" to the machine cabinet: X68. G NOTE: To avoid insurgence of an alarm condition at switch ON it is necessary to install the collimator (see paragraph 6. table top. 11. Move de equipment up/down and tilt it in both directions. 9. connect the foot control (cable X41) to the console. Usually it is advisable to screw in the grub on the opposite side where the interference is present in the up-down movement of the beam. 8. a resistor of 4. X46.5. in this case it is possible for example to use a male CANNON 37 pin connector with two voltage partitions built by a resistor of 4. E1. X14. 13. Release the two screws fixing the basement to the ground on the left side of the basement. E4. Check again the movements following the procedure from step 10.7kΩ between pins X45-17 and X45-33.7) and connect it by cable X45 or simulate collimator presence.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. X44.2. 12. close to the regulation grubs. This procedure should be repeated at the end of installation when the table is loaded with all its accessories (II. Connect the system cables to the rest of the accessories when it is decided wire them up during the procedures described above. In this stage the mechanical alignment of the moving beams with respect to the basement must be checked and possibly corrected.e. proceed as by the following step. a resistor of 4.7kΩ between pins X45-18 and X45-32. X-ray tube. ecc. X71.I. At this point the machine can be turned on and perform movements. X20. X99. X99. Connect the power cable to the R-S-T clamps on the insulation transformer inside the cabinet. if the middle beam during same movements is in touch with parts of the basements. X73. X70. Tight again the screws holding the basement to the ground. Make a few tilting movements to verify the correct situation and stop the procedure.6. X99. 15. 14.

10 Spot Film Device potmeter cable Spot Film Device cable Button Pad Cable Spot Film Device 24Vac power supply Spot Film Device PCB A10 X101 X0.11 Terminal block X0.10 Input PCB A2 Input PCB A2 Input PCB A2 Cabinet connector PCB A12 Terminal block X0.11 Emergency stop button cable (Rev. 3) 6-15 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Installation Location on the Table Table side cable code Cabinet side cable code X34 X35 X36 Location on the Cabinet Description Spot Film Device motor cable Spot Film Device motor cable Spot Film Device motor cable Spot Film Device motor cable Spot Film Device motor cable Spot Film Device motor cable Spot Film Device PCB A10 X68 X37 X38 X39 Spot Film Device activation PCB A4 Spot Film Device PCB A10 Spot Film Device PCB A10 Button pad PCB A8 Spot Film Device PCB A10 X19 X14 X16 X44 X19 X14 X16 X44 X0.

1 Compressor PCB A15 X99.6 SID motor cable Angulation connector PCB A13 X74 X0.2 X99.1 X99.1 X0.5 Cabinet side cable code X20 X46 X0.SERVICE MANUAL Installation Location on the Table Base unit connector PCB A11 Base unit connector PCB A11 Table side cable code X20 X46 X99.2 X105 X45 Cabinet connector PCB A12 Cabinet connector PCB A12 Emergency micro switch cable Angulation connector PCB A13 Compressor motor cable Angulation connector PCB A13 Collimator X105 X45 PCB connection cable Collimator cable APOLLO 6-16 (Rev.5 Terminal block X0.6 Terminal block X0.2 X0. 3) .1 Description Machine potmeter cable PCB connection cable X46 Angulation connectors PCB A13 X99.5 Location on the Cabinet Input PCB A2 Cabinet connector PCB A12 Terminal block X0.6 X99.2 Terminal block X0.

3 Control panel I. Ground cables 10 Power supply cable Main beam motor Power supply cable Angulation motor Power supply cable Middle beam motor (Rev.2 Base unit ground rod (W2) Beam motor Angulation motor Middle beam motor 10 Terminal block X0.8 Terminal block X0.4 Cabinet ground rod (W1) Inverter box Inverter box Inverter box Lift motor cable I.1 X0.SERVICE MANUAL Installation Location on the Table Table side cable code Cabinet side cable code X8 X22 X0.I. lift (optional) X106.8 X0. 3) 6-17 APOLLO .10 Terminal block X0.CPU PCB A14 X8 X0.I.9 X0.7 Location on the Cabinet Cabinet CPU PCB A1 Input PCB A2 Terminal block X0.7 Description Control panel .10 X106.9 Terminal block X0.4 10 X70 X71 X72 Terminal block X0.3 X0.

SERVICE MANUAL Installation

Location on the Table Scan motor Base unit ground rod (W2) Angulation motor Scan motor Main beam motor Middle beam motor

Table side cable code

Cabinet side cable code X73

Location on the Cabinet Inverter box Cabinet ground rod (W1) Terminal block X0.E2 Terminal block X0.E4 Terminal block X0.E1 Terminal block X0.E3

Description Power supply cable Scan motor Ground cables 10 Angulation motor ground cable Scan moto ground cable Main beam motor ground cable Middle beam motor ground cable

10

10 E2 E4 E1 E3

APOLLO

6-18

(Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL Installation

ANGULATION CONNECTOR CARD - A13
2 4 3 4 3 4 3

X89
1 2

1

2 1 4

X90
3

2 1 4

X85
3

2 1 4

X86
3 1

X100
2

1

2 1

X91
2

2 1

X87
2

2 1

X82 X97

2

X105

X80

1

X79 V3

1

X76 V4
2

1

X74
2

1

1

X94
1 8

1

X95 X98 X99

1

BASE UNIT CONNECTOR CARD - A11
X96 X20

2

1

X75

1

1

2

1

X83

1

2

V1

X77

1

2

X92

X84

1 2

1

2

X78

1

V2

2

X88

1

2

X93

X81

1

X46

1

2

X98

X97

2

Figure 6-12: Connector points diagram for machine connector board

(Rev. 3)

1

1

3

4

3

4

3

4

6-19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Installation

X20

X19

X14

X16

7
X22
X12
1 2

X21 X10 X11

X17

X15

X13

1 2

X4

X3A

INPUT CARD - A2
X3B
A2

X18

X12

5

9

1 2

X1 X2 X7

X4

A4

X34
1 2

8

X9

CPU CARD - A1 X8
A1

X3B

SFD ACTIVATION CARD - A4

X70, X71, X72, X73

X3A

X35

4

3

2

1

X33

S1

X36 X39 X38 X37
X25 X12
X15
A2 1

X6

X5B

X5A

X6

X5A

2

1

2

1

A3

X30 X107

X23

R, S, T CABINET GROUND ROD (W1)

X5B X27

OUTPUT CARD - A3

1

2

3

X17

X29

X26

X46 X105

5 9 7 8 10 10 (to the cabinet)

COMPRESSOR CARD - A15
X25 X28 X31 X29 X24
1 2

X21

X32

X26

1

X47

X49
9 1 2 1 2 1

X48
4

X45 X44

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

CABINET CONNECTOR CARD - A12

BASE UNIT GROUND ROD (W2)
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 E4 E3 E2 E1 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 S3 S3 10 10 N N

1

X99

X0

TERMINAL BLOCK X0
X42 X41 X8

A15

X0.11 X0.10 X0.9 X0.8 X0.7 X0.6 X0.5 X0.4 X0.3 X0.2 X0.1

Figure 6-13: Cable and ground connection points diagram

(Rev. 3)

6-21

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Installation

6.6

Image intensifier installation

G

NOTE: Assemble the I.I. trolley with the four Spot Film Device support wheels, using the nuts supplied, in such a way as to get a trolley like the one shown in the Figure, for the purposes of the I.I. installation.

Figure 6-14

(Rev. 3)

6-23

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Installation

6.6.1

9-12” fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation
1. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table and position it in such a way that the cable outlet on the I.I. power unit side is towards the base of the machine. 2. Use the lift control to lower the table until the I.I.'s fastening holes are aligned with those on the plates. You should proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps.

Figure 6-15 3. Fasten the I.I. to the plates with the screws, and tighten.

APOLLO

6-24

(Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL Installation

4. Check transversal and longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the I.I. If any alignment between the two parts is necessary, slacken screws "A" (Figure 6-16) on both sides to get sideways I.I movement relative to the Spot Film Device, or screws "B" (Figure 6-16) for longitudinal movements; once the desired position has been obtained, tighten the screws.

A

B
Figure 6-16 5. Connect the I.I. wiring and the angulation motor wiring on the left side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using the cable clip provided (Figure 6-17). The cables must be wired up so that they run "parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables already in the machine.

Cable clip

Figure 6-17

(Rev. 3)

6-25

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Installation

6.6.2

16" fixed Image Intensifier (I.I.) installation (Toshiba model)
1. Using the bolts supplied fix the two I.I. fixing plates as indicated in Figure 6-18 taking into consideration the 530 mm (20.9") distance between the two guides. Any adjustments to this distance may be made with the plate-guide fixing screws.

530 (20.9")

Figure 6-18 2. Place the I.I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). Place the remote-controlled table high enough to allow the I.I. to be positioned under the Spot Film Device. Move the I.I. to the table and position it in such a way that the cable outlet on the I.I. power unit side is towards the base of the machine. 3. Use the lift control to lower the table so that the I.I. fixing plates run inside the Spot Film Device's walls and that the holes "A" (6 per side Figure 6-19) on the walls are aligned with the fastening holes on the I.I. support guides. It is advisable to proceed cautiously at this stage to prevent any damage to the I.I. occurring. It is therefore best to lower the table by small steps. 4. Fasten the plates to the Spot Film Device's shoulders by means of the screws provided. 5. Check transversal and longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the I.I. If any alignment between the two parts is necessary, slacken the I.I. guide-plate support fastenings screws to get sideways I.I movement relative to the Spot Film Device or screws "A" (6 per side - Figure 6-19) for longitudinal movements; once the desired position has been obtained, tighten the screws.

APOLLO

6-26

(Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL Installation

A

Figure 6-19 6. Connect the I.I. wiring and the angulation motor wiring on the left side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using the cable clip provided (Figure 6-20). The cables must be wired up so that they run "parallel" to each other, following the path of the cables already in the machine.

Cable clip

Figure 6-20
(Rev. 3)

6-27

APOLLO

I. The positioning of the I. S29 for lower position.I. lift movement can produce collision between I. The I.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6.6. proceed with maximum attention to the actions indicated in the following paragraphs. lift is obtained by a motor which movement is stopped by 2 microswitches: S28 for upper position. APOLLO 6-28 (Rev. 3) . and inner SFD parts.-lift end run positions can be adjusted modifying the microswitches activating cams.I.3 Image Intensifier (I.) with lift installation WARNING: The I.I.I.

lift cable to X106 terminals. Get out from set-up. on the trolley (Figure 6-14).1 9” with lift Image Intensifier (I.I. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps. lift up to the upper and limit.I.I.6. Fix the I.15) and by the compressor joystick move the I.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. to be positioned under the Spot Film Device.1. anchorage plate as indicated in the Figure. 3) 6-29 APOLLO . 3. 2. inside the walls of the Spot Film Device until the 4 fixing holes on the I.I. Lower the table by sliding the I. anchorage plate are in line with the corresponding four in the lift plate (Figure 6-22). (Rev.I.) installation 1. Check that: − measuring chamber is removed − grid in park position − cassettes jaws completely open. this enables proper alignment of the two plates. You should proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the I.I.I. Place the I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly.I.I. 4. Screw the anchorage plate to the lift plate without tightening using the screws provided. Place the remote-controlled table high enough to allow the I. Select cell 133 (group 100 paragraph 10. anchoring plate and the lift plate. Connect the I.Figure 6-22) between the I.I. 7.I. Spacer Anchorage plate Figure 6-21 5. Insert the 4 spacers provided (2 each side .3. Move the I. 6.

this ensures correct sideways alignment between the I.I.I. Check that during the I. The distance between cassette jaw lower side and I. set cell 133 again and move by joystick the I. the angulation motor wiring and the lift wiring on the left side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using the cable clip provided (Figure 6-17).I. Longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary spacers that are inserted where there are those already present. if necessary adjust the lower end run cam. and internal SFD parts. 11. The cables must be wired up so that they run "parallel" to each other.I. 3) . wiring. following the path of the cables already in the machine.I. APOLLO 6-30 (Rev. lift movement does not happens any collision between I. Check longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the I. Check that the conditions on item 1 are the same.2"). lift on the upper end limit. must be never less than 5 mm (0.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 8. Spacer Figure 6-22 9. and the Spot Film Device. 10. Tighten the screws at the slots' midline.I.I. Connect the I.

I.15) and by the compressor joystick move the I. Spacer Anchorage plate Figure 6-23 5.I. Move the I. You should proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the I.1.6. 4.3. anchorage plate as indicated in the Figure.I. 3) 6-31 APOLLO .I. 7. inside the walls of the Spot Film Device until the 4 fixing holes on the I.I. (Rev.) with lift installation 1. Fix the I. Get out from set-up. This enables proper alignment of the two plates. Select cell 133 (group 100 paragraph 10. lift cable to X106 terminals.I. Insert the 4 spacers provided (2 each side . anchoring plate and the lift plate. anchorage plate are in line with the corresponding four in the lift plate (Figure 6-24).I.I.I. Check that: − measuring chamber is removed − grid in park position − cassettes jaws completely open. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps. Lower the table by sliding the I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly. to be positioned under the Spot Film Device. lift up to the upper and limit.Figure 6-24) between the I.I. Place the remote-controlled table high enough to allow the I. Place the I.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. Connect the I. 6.I.2 12” Image Intensifier (I. Screw the anchorage plate to the lift plate without tightening using the screws provided. on the trolley (Figure 6-14). 3. 2.

must be never less than 5 mm (0.I. lift movement does not happens any collision between I. Longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary spacers that are inserted where there are those already present. The cables must be wired up so that they run "parallel" to each other.I. Check that the conditions on item 1 are the same. Tighten the screws at the slots' midline. and the Spot Film Device. APOLLO 6-32 (Rev. if necessary adjust the lower end run cam.I.I. wiring. Connect the I. 11. Check that during the I. the angulation motor wiring and the lift wiring on the left side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using the cable clip provided (Figure 6-17). Check longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the I.I. lift on the upper end limit.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 8. set cell 133 again and move by joystick the I. Spacer Figure 6-24 9. 10.I.2"). this ensures correct sideways alignment between the I. 3) .I. and internal SFD parts. The distance between cassette jaw lower side and I. following the path of the cables already in the machine.

Fix the I. 3) 6-33 APOLLO .I. (Rev.3. 6. lift cable to X106 terminals.I.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. Screw the anchorage plate to the lift plate without tightening using the screws provided. to be positioned under the Spot Film Device.'s two anchoring brackets as indicated in the Figure.6.I. Place the I. to the table at the point of the lift assembly.I. Connect the I. lift up to the upper and limit. Select cell 133 (group 100 paragraph 10. You should proceed cautiously at this stage to avoid any damage occurring to the I. Get out from set-up. inside the walls of the Spot Film Device until the 4 fixing holes on the anchoring brackets are in line with the corresponding four holes in the lift plate (Figure 6-26).I. 3.I. Use the lift control to lower the table by sliding the I. on the trolley (Figure 6-14).I.1.I. 2. Anchoring brackets Figure 6-25 5.I.3 16” Image Intensifier (I.Place the remote-controlled table high enough to allow the I. Move the I. Check that: − measuring chamber is removed − grid in park position − cassettes jaws completely open. It is therefore advisable to lower the table in small steps.15) and by the compressor joystick move the I. 4.) with lift installation 1.

2"). following the path of the cables already in the machine. 3) . APOLLO 6-34 (Rev. and the Spot Film Device. set cell 133 again and move by joystick the I. 9. must be never less than 5 mm (0.I. Check that the conditions on item 1 are the same. Tighten the screws at the slots' midline. Connect the I. if necessary adjust the lower end run cam. this ensures correct sideways alignment between the I. Check that during the I. lift on the upper end limit. Spacer Figure 6-26 8. The cables must be wired up so that they run "parallel" to each other. the angulation motor wiring and the lift wiring on the left side of the end wall of the Spot Film Device using the cable clip provided (Figure 6-20).I.I. wiring. 10.I.I. Check longitudinal alignment between the Spot Film Device and the I. The distance between cassette jaw lower side and I.I.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 7.I. and internal SFD parts. longitudinal alignment is obtained with the supplementary spacers that are inserted where the bracket fastening screws are (Figure 6-26). lift movement does not happens any collision between I.

06") and of 3 mm (0.Collimator group G NOTE: International regulations require that the total filtration of the X-ray beam must be greater than 2.eq. 3) 6-35 APOLLO . these disks can be inserted into the ray output window. Taking into consideration the filtration in the ray tube.1") • 6x25 and 6x30 fastening screws 1. Position the tube support in the corresponding fastening pin so as to join together the two tube rotation release levers (Figure 6-27). NOTE: The collimator kit consists of the following: • collimator fastening cone H=17 mm (0.0 mm Al.7") • additional 0. filtration.5 mm Al.5 mm (0.5 mm Al filters • collimator installation spacers of 1. Fastening pin G Support screw Release levers Tube support Figure 6-27 (Rev.5 mm Al. add the necessary filtration with the aluminium disks provided with the tube or with the collimator kit.eq. filtration. Insert the support screw onto the pin and tighten in the position that it is best for the installation of the tube.7 Installation of the Tube .eq. The Ralco collimators have 1.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. as shown on its technical plate. The Villa collimators have 0.

a. With the group at 0° rotation.15"±0. 3) . taking account of the fact that the choice of screw length is determined by the number of spacers employed. condition. the corresponding micro safety switch inside the arm must be in n.SERVICE MANUAL Installation G NOTE: Point 2 only applies where the system is supplied with the Villa or the Ralco collimator. Position the tube on the support and at the same time apply the collimator fastening cone (Figure 6-28). To do this the collimator kit's spacers have to be used (refer to the technical data that comes with the X-ray tube to determine the point of focus). Install the collimator on the cone using the four fastening hooks and connect it to the X45 cable. The collimator cable length is calculated to permit machine servicing even when the collimator is out of beam. to ensure proper correspondence between the field of the rays and the collimator light field. Fix in position with the collimator's screws.04"). WARNING: Incorrect choice of screw length may lead to inadequate fastening of the X-ray tube group where short screws are used or possible damage to the casing if the screws used are too long. this distance must be 80±1 mm (3. 2. When doing this take due account of the distance between the tube focus and the cone/collimator plane. 3. X-ray tube Spacer Collimator fastening cone Collimator Figure 6-28 APOLLO 6-36 (Rev.

To complete this operation it is necessary to power the SID and remove the chain and its right side support (Figure 6-31) gaining access to the fixing screws on the column stand. Once the cabling inside the X-ray tube support arm and checked its functionality. It is advisable only to use the fastening points indicated for the machine. These must be as far as possible free from clamps.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 4. Make sure the micro safety switch's cable with the tube at 0° is anchored to the arm so that it is independent from the rest of the cables. Wire up the cables inside the arm (Figure 6-29). The abundance required for that to be permitted will be hidden inside the arm's top cover. to prevent damage on tube rotation. after having tested the rotation of the X-ray tube proceed to mount the arm cover (Figure 6-30 – 4 screws preset on the column stand + 8 screws on the arm). Only at this point proceed to the cabling of the cables inside the column. The cables must be arranged so that the tube can rotate without them getting damaged. 6. Figure 6-29 5. (Rev. with just the minimum indispensable. 3) 6-37 APOLLO . Join the cover to the X-ray tube support by the two front half circles (Figure 6-30).

having the cables coming out from the left side .SERVICE MANUAL Installation Figure 6-30 7. and insert all cables coming from the X-ray tube collimator group. Open the chain. 8. Tighten the cables on the dedicated fixing point on the column. on the back of the chain (Figure 6-31). making them run parallel. previously removed. following the routing of the cables already present. 9. insert them in the back chains. Close and mount back the chain on its supports and then on the column. Chain support Figure 6-31 APOLLO 6-38 (Rev. 3) .

8 Mounting the covers When installation is complete. referring to Figure 6-32 and Figure 6-33.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. mount the covers. (Rev. 3) 6-39 APOLLO . Install the compressor arm with the cup.

SERVICE MANUAL Installation THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 6-40 (Rev. 3) .

I.SERVICE MANUAL Installation * (*) Cover supplied only where there is I. 3) 6-41 APOLLO . lift Figure 6-32: Covers installation diagram (front view) (Rev.

3) 6-43 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Installation Figure 6-33: Covers installation diagram (rear view) (Rev.

3.9. Spacer "B" Nuts and washers Pins Spacer "B" Figure 6-34 (Rev. On each support arm there are four locking pins that coincide with the relative holes on the tabletop head mounts.9 6. Screw on all the eight pins the relative nuts and washers. 1. Position the tabletop on the arms till the locking pins fit into the relative holes (Figure 6-34). lock tight. Remove the two iron beams at the extremities of the tabletop. 3) 6-45 APOLLO . generally used to avoid possible plane deflections during transport.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. 2. Unscrew the eight nuts from the locking pins and the relative eight washers. 4.1 Tabletop assembly Curved tabletop assembly The tabletop is symmetric and can be assembled in either directions.

could require an adaptation to avoid any collision risk between SFD cover and accessories fixation device.5 lbs) and check that distance between SFD and accessories fixation is not less than 4/5 mm. insert spacer "B" as shows in Figure 6-34 up to obtain the desiderate size. Charge the table top in horizontal position with a medium patient weight (70-100 kg / 154. 2/3mm Figure 6-35 c. 3) . weight. The gap between table top and accessories fixation increases because of the SFD small flexion caused by the I.I. Move the table up to horizontal position.SERVICE MANUAL Installation WARNING: The distance between table top and upper SFD cover. By moving table top and scanning. put the patient handle at the centre of the external part of upper SFD cover (Figure 6-35). b.3-220. Otherwise insert other spacers "B" up to obtain as indicated. If distance is less than indicated. Proceed as follow: a. APOLLO 6-46 (Rev. Put the table in vertical position and check the distance between upper SFD cover and fixation handle device: it must be not less than 2/3 mm (Figure 6-35).

Nuts and washers Spacer "B" Fixing plates "A" Pins Spacer "B" Figure 6-36 (Rev. Remove from the tabletop the four fixing plates "A".2 Flat tabletop assembly The tabletop is symmetric and can be assembled in either directions.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6. Lock the fixing plates "A" on the support arms by the pins and relevant nuts (Figure 6-36). 2. 4. Unscrew the eight nuts from the locking pins and the relative eight washers.9. 3. 1. On each support arm there are four locking pins that coincide with the relative holes on the tabletop fixing plates. Lock the tabletop to the fixing plates by the eight screws removed on item 1. 3) 6-47 APOLLO .

3-220. Move the table up to horizontal position. could require an adaptation to avoid any collision risk. b. The gap between table top and tabletop profile increases because of the SFD small flexion caused by the I. Put the table in vertical position and check the distance between upper SFD cover and tabletop profile: it must be not less than 2/3 mm. APOLLO 6-48 (Rev. weight. If distance is less than indicated. Otherwise insert other spacers "B" up to obtain as indicated. Proceed as follow: a.SERVICE MANUAL Installation WARNING: The distance between table top and upper SFD cover.5 lbs) and check that distance between SFD and tabletop profile is not less than 4/5 mm. 3) . Charge the table top in horizontal position with a medium patient weight (70-100 kg / 154.I. insert spacer "B" as shows in Figure 6-36 up to obtain the desiderate size.

Digital) and verify the anticollision safeties After having completing the calibration of the X-ray tube. this operation is fundamental in case the power line is 60Hz Check the functionality of all movements for the different functional modalities (Spot film device.SERVICE MANUAL Installation 6.II (see chapter 19) Check that the cassette pusher position is correctly adjusted in function of the cassette type used. • • • • • • • (Rev. implement centering procedures for X-ray tube – Collimator . Tomography. items from 10 to 15 Enter the room dimension data (see paragraph 11. It must press in such a way the cassette position is maintained also with table in vertical position. but without create a critical condition for cassette ejection. Angiography.1) Measure the current real speed of the movements (see paragraph 11.Serial Changer . The check must be done with minimum 18x24 (8"x10") and 35x43 (14"x17") cassettes size.1).1) Enter configuration parameters (see paragraph 11.5.10 Final verifications Once the mechanical installation has been completed.5. point from 8 to 13 Centre the middle beam into plastic sliding parts of the base when tilting angle is negative (trendelembourg) as described on paragraph 6. 3) 6-49 APOLLO . To do so proceed as follows: • Check that the beam movement does not interfere with the basement and if necessary implement the corrective actions described in the procedure at the end of paragraph 6. it is necessary to configure the Apollo table and check its functionality. unlock the 6 fixing screws and slide the pusher plate "A" in the required direction (Figure 6-37). If the pusher adjustment is not optimized.

if necessary correct as needed.SERVICE MANUAL Installation Pusher plate "A" Figure 6-37 • Check centering for the different cassette format (see chapter 19). 3) . APOLLO 6-50 (Rev.

dialoguing with the control panel. • a Ram containing the date and time. Some information about the characteristics of the system's CPU that could come in useful. It is easy to deduce what the function of the PCB’s listed above is from their names and they are situated in the electrical cabinet with exception of the control panel PCB. is given below. again from the CPU. Also present are: • a flash eprom containing the alarm history and the machine cycle times • an EEprom containing the equipment set up data and the positions related to MODE 1-2-3 keys.SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table 7 THE FUNCTIONING LOGIC OF THE TABLE The Apollo table has been designed with an electronic leading-edge management and control circuit. The job of the program contained in this Eprom is to decode the state of the joystick and the keys and send this information to the CPU on the CAN BUS. Moreover. The circuit is based on PCB’s called: • A1 CPU PCB • A2 "input" PCB • A3 "output" PCB • A4 Spot Film Device motor "power driver" PCB (not present in "All Digital" version) • A14 "control panel" PCB • A15 "compressor motor command" PCB (not present in the version without compressor). The "control panel" A14 PCB is fitted with a Motorola MC68332 processor and a 128K x8 Eprom. (Rev. The incorporated program manages the entire functioning logic of the equipment including. Furthermore. The A1"CPU" PCB is also equipped with a Motorola MC68332 processor the job of which is to act as the main processor and a 512K x8 Eprom. the data regarding the alarm history and the machine cycles are initially deposited in the Ram and every ten minutes they are transferred to the flash eprom. as said before. • A16 "additional collimator filters control" PCB (for collimator with motorized additional filters movement version only). 3) 7-1 APOLLO . its job is also to receive the status of the led and the graphic and alphanumeric strings to show on the display.

The release of the equipment management software contained in the Eprom on the CPU is shown on the control panel display for three seconds when the equipment is powered up. 3) .SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table There is also an AT89C2051 processor on the CPU that functions as a Supervisor microprocessor with an internal eprom containing the supervision and serial and parallel control program for the channels responsible for the movements. APOLLO 7-2 (Rev.

the control panel. At this point the main processor and the controller begin to perform the checks that can make sure all the conditions are regular. the input PCB and part of the output PCB is powered through the T2 transformer. i. (Rev. the procedure for the initialisation of the Spot Film Device begins the purpose of which is to move the inside parts of the Spot Film Device to the default positions.SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table 7. from the time the power circuits have been powered up and when the organs of the Spot Film Device have reached the positions defined. While this is happening. all the movements of the table are disabled and the control panel's display shows the flashing message. "Initialisation. One phase of the coil of the power remote switch K1L is interrupted by the series of these two relays. All the table movements and the functions will. Please wait" When the initialisation procedure is successfully completed.1 Functioning sequences Powering up and initialisation sequence On powering up the electronics of the CPU. 3) 7-3 APOLLO .1 7. the control panel display changes and shows the data for the active mode.e. both the main processor and the controller activate the respective "ready" relay after an interval of three seconds. at this point. they therefore permit the energising of the K1L that. If that is the case. through the closure of its contacts. At this point. will power the table's power circuits. The open contacts of these two relays are connected in series. be enabled. When they are activated.1.

2 microswitches are activated simultaneously. enabled to activate a movement is pressed. If all the conditions are in order. whether a movement output or a controlling output for an external accessory. Once the feedback potmeter is launched it informs the processor about the position and speed of the movement itself. In order to indicate the working conditions.SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table 7. As a block diagram of the sequences described above. all the outputs are fitted with a signalling led that lights up when an output. from the control panel to the main PCB.2 Activation sequence for a movement When a joystick. is active.1. The first sends the movement activation signal. the below is useful for explaining the functioning logic in even clearer terms. along the CAN BUS line. The second opens the single fault circuit (SF) that is controlled either from the main processor or the controller. APOLLO 7-4 (Rev. the processor will activate the circuits that control the engines. 3) .

3) 7-5 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table BLOCK DIAGRAM POWERING UP SEQUENCE Table power up Electronics power supply T2 ON BLOCK DIAGRAM SIMPLE MOVEMENT Movement Joystick activation SF OK YES ↓ Send SF circuit Hardware Opening Data serial SF OK YES ↓ Movement or logic output activation SF OK YES ↓ HW power activation SF OK YES ↓ Motor movement SF OK YES ↓ Potmeter feed back SF OK YES ↓ Joystick release output power down Movement stop SF reclosure SF OK NO → NO → ↓ NO → ↓ NO → NO → ↓ READY relay power down Signalling ALARMS NO → ↑ NO → ↑ Check electronics OK YES ↓ 3 sec. READY relay ON K1L ON NO → Signalling ALARMS ↑ Hardware electronics check OK YES ↓ End of message "Initialisation" SW table motor movement enabling NO → Turning off READY relay (Rev.

the READY relays are deenergised and a flashing alarm appears on the control panel. This condition cannot be reset as it is a serious fault. If this fault does not compromise the functioning of the system (Example: the generator is not "ready" within the set time). These three different situations cause the consequences that are analysed below. the second resets the alarm and restores the normal conditions. that could seriously compromise the functioning of the equipment. The first time silences the "beep". To remove the alarm and re-enable all the movements it will be necessary to push the reset joystick downwards twice.2.2. A search must be made to see what the cause of this effect is. a few movements are disabled by the SW and the relative alarm flashes on the display of the control panel accompanied by an intermittent "beep". APOLLO 7-6 (Rev. 7. To remove the alarm and re-enable the movements the equipment must be turned off.2 Fault Conditions Three different anomaly conditions can arise while the equipment is in operation: • Condition fault • Operating fault • Power circuit faults.1 Generation of a condition alarm While the equipment is in operation a fault can occur in the table or one of the accessories connected to it. 7. 3) .2 Generation of a operating alarm If the processor recognises an abnormal situation caused by the SF control or by other components interacting with the processor.SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table 7.

an emergency end of run will be intercepted. the powering up procedure after the power cutting out must be followed in order to restore the normal operating conditions described in the relevant chapter. (Rev. It will therefore be necessary to turn off the equipment to remove the alarm situation.2. 3) 7-7 APOLLO . This will mean the main processor will turn off the READY relays and the controller and generate flashing alarm 080 on the control panel display. the one below is useful for explaining the functioning logic in even clearer terms. After removing the cause of the failure.SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table 7. As a block diagram of the sequences described above.3 Generation of an alarm caused by the power circuit If a movement of the table or the Spot Film Device should for any reason go over the SW run determined by the potmeter. This will entail the turning off of the power remote switch K1L with the consequent opening of the power control input (X15 pin 10).

SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table CONDITION ALARM Malfunction that is: resettable Flashing alarm on display Joystick reset: .Single Fault .Component ← Turning off READY relay Alarm on display: flashing NON resettable Turning off equipment Troubleshooting POWER ALARM Malfunction that is: Table emergency Deenergising: K1L Input opening X15 pin 10 Alarm on display: 080 flashing Turning off equipment Troubleshooting ↑ NO → APOLLO 7-8 (Rev.2nd beep alarm OFF Cause of malfunction: removed YES ↓ Restore normal operating conditions FUNCTIONAL ALARM Malfunction that is: .1st beep OFF . 3) .

TV chain etc. are connected to the input and output PCB’s by means of the X0 terminal clamp. 4) 8-1 APOLLO . The hardware characteristics of these signals are listed below.1 Output signals from the Apollo table The outputs shown below are dependent on an open collector circuit (ULN2803) NPN active at 0 V. 8.2 mm Cu 56 X27 pin 16 (Rev.1 mm Cu Recursive filter x8 / Collimator additional filter 1 mm Al + 0. No circuits with pull up resistances of over 30 Vdc with maximum current not exceeding 100 mA may be connected to these outputs.SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table 8 IN/OUT INTERFACE CONNECTION All the input and output signals towards the accessories such as: generator. X0 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 52 53 54 55 Connector X27 pin 5 X27 pin 24 X27 pin 6 X27 pin 25 X27 pin 7 X27 pin 26 X27 pin 8 X27 pin 27 X27 pin 9 X27 pin 28 X27 pin 10 X27 pin 29 X27 pin 11 X27 pin 30 X27 pin 12 X27 pin 31 X27 pin 14 X27 pin 33 X27 pin 15 X27 pin 34 Description Digital reconstruction 2nd tomographic speed set 3rd tomographic speed set Request for fluoro Exposure request Preparation request Digital preparation request Request for second snap to be taken 1st tomographic speed set 4th tomographic speed set 7° tomography angle set 20° tomography angle set 30° tomography angle set 45° tomography angle set Rays ON without request Man/auto fluoro Kv selection Angio steps Motion detection Recursive filter x0 / Collimator additional filter 2 mm Al Recursive filter x4 / Collimator additional filter 1 mm Al + 0.

Contrast control analogue The following outputs are part of an optoisolator circuit (LH1520) that must be polarised.5 Vdc. Fluoro Kv control analogue The control outlets for the room monitor depend on an analogue circuit (TLC274) with a resistance range from 0 Ω to 4. It is possible to apply a maximum load of 5 mA. 3) . It is possible apply a max load of 3 W.7 KΩ. The maximum voltage and current applied must not exceed 25 Vac with 70 mA.I. Scan reverse circuit Right/left image scan reverse Up/Down image scan reverse Common for Zoom I.SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table The manual fluoro Kv control output is dependent on an analogical circuit (TLC271) with a range of voltages from 1. X0 61 62 Connector X28 pin 1 X28 pin 2 Description Mon. X0 28 26 27 32 31 30 29 Connector X27 pin 3 X27 pin 4 X27 pin 22 X27 pin 1 X27 pin 20 X27 pin 2 X27 pin 21 Description Common for im. Brightness control analogue Mon.8 Vdc to 6. circuit Maximum Zoom (minimum field) Medium zoom (medium field) Minimum Zoom (maximum field) APOLLO 8-2 (Rev. X0 59 Connector X27 pin 19 Description Man.

3) 8-3 APOLLO . X0 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Connector X13 pin 1 X13 pin 2 X13 pin 3 X13 pin 4 X13 pin 5 X13 pin 6 X13 pin 7 X-ray on Digital work station Spot Film Device work station Ceiling stand safety (*) External safety barrier (*) Collimator additional filters out of position Description Generator ready for rays (*) Jumpered to ground by default to disable the feature.2 Input signals towards the Apollo table The inputs below depend on an open collector circuit (74HC245) NPN active at 0 V. This circuit formed with 24Vdc-referred pull-up resistors. The typical absorption of these circuits is equal to 10 mA max.SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table 8. (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL The functioning logic of the table THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 8-4 (Rev. 3) .

operation and adjustment of the Apollo table.SERVICE MANUAL Configuration access and description of the data groups 9 CONFIGURATION ACCESS AND DESCRIPTION OF THE DATA GROUPS All the data necessary for the configuration. In the table below the subdivisions of groups of data and their functions. the dip-switches to activate and the access codes to be keyed-in are listed. thereby causing the equipment to malfunction. X. WARNING: The Authorised Technician is recommended not to communicate these codes so that non-authorised persons are prevented from entering the memory cells and changing them. When powering up. including the Checksum that is updated every time the data varies. are contained in the EEprom. 3) 9-1 APOLLO .MM where: • Row 1 = version of the software also shown on the label on the Eprom • Row 2 = date and time of the compilation of the operating files. If there is no correspondence between the two pieces of data the alarm 090 is generated. as well as activating the switches. The version of the installed software in the Eprom on the CPU is shown on the display for 3 seconds every time the machine is turned on: Software rel. The data contained on the EEprom are sub-divided into "groups". therefore write new data in the cells. There can be up to 99 position "cells" inside each of these groups. the Checksum of the data is verified again and it is compared with that currently in the EEprom. (Rev.XX DD – MM – YY HH. In order to be able to edit. A storage position will therefore be configured with three figures of which: 0 ↓ Number of the group 00 ↓ Position of the cell To access the read only function of the data contained in these cells it will be enough to position the switch of the group of dip-switches on the CPU at ON. the data are compared. it will be necessary to key in an access code.

always indicate the version of the software on the equipment. Dip switch 1 2 3 4 1+2 1 1 2 2 3 + + + + + 3 4 3 4 4 Code C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C3 C3 C4 C4 Group 101 201 301 711 401 701 751 721 731 850 Subroutine Potmeter adjustment Installation data PDI controlled motor setting data “time” setting -Reset alarm memory Equipment dimension setting Run shutters and cassette Eeprom copying Alarm history visualisation Spot Film Device and table life test Remote service function Equipment cycles and time display and resetting The above mentioned groups are divided into positions. The four access codes are : C1 = 9006 C2 = 2573 C3 = 8425 C4 = 1541 The following table shows the dip switch combinations – access code and the functions of the various groups. Group Potmeter adjustment Installation data PDI controlled motor setting data “Time” setting Reset alarm memory Position and function From 101 to 133 setting of the maximum and minimum of the various potmeters From 201 to 262 typical settings linked to the installation and the equipment From 301 to 400 setting data for control of motors with PDI function 711 = Time and date display 712 = Year setting 713 = Month setting 714 = Day setting 715 = Hour setting 716 = Minute setting 717 = Second setting 718 = Clock correction 719 = Reset alarm memory APOLLO 9-2 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Configuration access and description of the data groups For any reporting of a malfunction or request for technical help. The function of the various positions inside the groups is shown below. 3) .

3) 9-3 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Configuration access and description of the data groups Group Equipment dimension setting Run shutters and cassette Eeprom copying Position and function From 401 to 686 dimensions and run setting 701 = Copy from EEprom to Ram 702 = Copy from Ram to EEprom Alarm history visualisation Extended diagnosis (from 1 to 20) 751 = Position and alarm data display Spot Film Device part position and function display 753 = Joystick display 754 = Digital input display 755 = Digital output display Reduced diagnosis (from 21 to 100) 800 = Alarm data display (2 alarms) Spot Film Device and table life 721 = Life test choice test 722 = Spot Film Device life test (not available on "All Digital" version) 723 = Table life test Remote service function 731 = Remote service function Equipment cycle and time display 850 = Cycle and time display and resetting 851 = Time display 852 = Time display From 853 to 867 resetting cycles one field at a time (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Configuration access and description of the data groups THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 9-4 (Rev. 3) .

The control panel display will show: 101 where: 101 (369) -40. Turn on the equipment. The following will only be shown for the cells referring to the adjustment of collimator movements (from 117 to 122 included ): 117 where: 117 (492) 1178 mm 000 mm 2090/ Collimator… (492) 1178 mm 000 mm 2090 / 4096 Collimator width min (closed) = = = = = number of the group and the position value presently in the memory current position of the SID position to reach current value of the potmeters expressed on a scale with a maximum value of 4096 = brief description of the function of the selected cell.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data 10 ACCESS AND ADJUSTMENT OF GROUP 100 DATA To access the data contained in group 100 the procedures described below must be followed. (Rev. turn switch 1 in the dip-switch assembly in the CPU PCB to ON. v Reading data 1. 2.0° 2090/ Angulation… (369) -40. Turn off the equipment.0° 2090 / 4096 Angulation min (head side) = number of the group and the position = value presently in the memory = position that the organ has to reach corresponding to the value at minimum = current value of the potmeters expressed on a scale with a maximum value of 4096 = brief description of the function of the selected cell. 3) 10-1 APOLLO .

the value is not accepted in the memory and alarm "088 Wrong SID" will be shown on the display. Press key MODE1 and hold it down for 1 sec. Press key MODE2.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data WARNING: The SID value must be 980 mm (38. APOLLO 10-2 (Rev.6"). 3) . The value of the position to reach varies as the SID varies so the SID value is only correct when it is 980 mm (38. it is not possible in this phase to edit any setting or perform any movement. in this condition. This setting will appear by scrolling from right to left on the position for the inputting of the code. v Data editing 1. respectively. 3. This value is the dimension that the ray field (and light field for the convenience of the measurement) must have at tabletop level.6") during adjustment. 2. When this time has elapsed. The display will show the flashing message CORR that indicates it is possible to write the access code. the display will show: 002 0000 Key in access code where: 002 = number of the position for the input of the access codes 0000 = position for the access code (see chapter 9). Set the code relative to this data group (see chapter 9) by means of the keys that. If the value is different when the MODE2 acceptance of storage to memory key is pressed. become numbers in accordance with the schematic below. By pressing the MODE3 and TEST keys it is possible to increase and decrease the number of cells to be displayed. As said beforehand. 3.

5. 3) 10-3 APOLLO . If the confirmation key is not pressed within 15 sec. the display will show the message: Access to groups 101 – 301 – 401 that indicates that it is possible to access groups 100-300-400. if the confirmation key is pressed within the specified time. the operations must repeated from number 2.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data 4. If the code is correct. instead: Code incorrect: access denied In this case. hold key MODE1 down for one second. what is written disappears from the displays and the non-edited data remains in the memory. the following message appears on the screen. Press key MODE2 to confirm. If the code keyed in is wrong. thanks to the use of the code that has just been keyed in. the flashing CORR message disappears. in function of which switches are positioned at ON. (Rev. of the inputting of the last digit. However. The display returns to the position of the group 100 abandoned on entry to position 002.

It will also be possible to perform the movements for the adjustment of the potmeters by using the compressor movement joystick. the reference value of the maximum and end run voltages must. that is to say. At the same time. In this program the speed of the PDI movements are set permanently in the adjustment software and cannot be modified. Furthermore. the Apollo table bases the control of its movements on the feedback generated by the potmeters.1 Potmeter adjustment As said before. and the potmeter value will decrease. before performing any movement. the anticollision program is not active so. and therefore memorise the new potmeter value. 3) . the movement will hit the emergency switch causing the equipment to stop. If the joystick is pushed upwards. APOLLO 10-4 (Rev. To carry out the adjustment. If the joystick is pushed downwards. towards its minimum. the data in brackets at the side of the group number and position is updated with the new value.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data 10. make sure that that there is not risk of collision during it. be stored in the corresponding cells in the EEprom. the direction of the set movement will be towards its maximum and the potmeter value shown on the display will increase. only this joystick will be active (with the exception of the adjustment of the beam and middle beam movements and collimator as described further on) and the motor that is activated will depend on the cell that is set. WARNING: During the adjustment phase. The display will show the following for three seconds: **** ACCEPTED **** to confirm that the memorisation has been successful. If the set run is exceed. the direction of the movement will be the opposite. These potmeters must therefore be adjusted. At this point it will be possible to edit the data of the cells making up this group. key MODE2 must be pressed. since the software end runs are set in this program no stopping on them is activated. In this program.

but in practice this operation is never performed. These limits are shown on the display depending on the cell that is set. In the table below the functions of group 100 cells are shown. These positions break the power supply to the hardware circuits (they determine the opening of the K1L remote switch). N. in order to ensure maximum safety also in cases where there is a malfunction in the movement electronics control. 121 Optional Iris collim. 120 Height collim.0 kg 15.A.1.0° -800 mm +800 mm 135 mm 683 mm 135 mm 740 mm -160 mm +160 mm 1016 mm 1516 mm Square 000 mm 490 mm 000 mm 490 mm N. Furthermore. In fact this modifies the functional characteristics of the table.lim -40. LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW/HIGH LOW/HIGH Value min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max Movement direction Anticlockwise (head end) Clockwise (feet side) Left (head end) Right (feet side) Withdrawal / decrease Extension/ increase Withdrawal / decrease Extension/ increase Inside Outside LOW HIGH Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Descent/Rise Descent/Rise Default. 123 Compressor 124 Compressor (Rev. there are hardware emergency switches positioned in such a way as to cut in when the software end run does not stop the movement.1 Cell data and list The limits of the movements are set by default during the factory's predelivery testing of the equipment.A. It is possible to vary these limits by modifying the data in the cells of group 400. 122 Optional Iris collim. Thus any modification of the run limits also entails the mechanical repositioning of these switches. Iris 000 mm 415 mm 000 mm 415 mm 85 mm 570 mm 00.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data 10. Cell Movement 101 Angulation 102 Angulation 103 Scan 104 Scan 105 Main beam 106 Main beam 107 Middle beam 108 Middle beam 111 Transversal tabletop 112 Transversal tabletop 113 SID 114 SID 117 Collimator width 118 Collimator width 119 Height collim. 3) Joyst.direct.0° +40.5 kg APOLLO 10-5 .

0 mm Switch high=ON Switch low=ON min/max Descent/Rise G NOTE: Position 133 does not refer to a potmeter but is used for the adjustment of the switches of the end runs of the I. As far as the position to reach to carry out the adjustments of the minimum and maximum positions. reach the position required with the movement then turn the potmeter until reaching the indicated value. APOLLO 10-6 (Rev.0 mm 455. In some cases. in some case. and the potmeter is used in the central area. When one switch is active on the display the ON value is shown. As said before. Once this position has been reached. This is why points other than those shown in the figures have been chosen to facilitate the calibration.0 mm 000. 3) .I. release the potmeter. the potmeter must indicate a near value (a tolerance of up to 100 units can be reached) as shown in the following table. on the next few pages by means of pictures and descriptions. as shown in the last column of the proceeding table. while the other has the OFF value. This is because the indicated value is the result of software calculations having table points of origin as a reference but.I.) Default. lift Joyst.0 mm +65. the default value that the movement must reach at the minimum and maximum is shown on the display.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data Cell 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 Movement Grid Grid Cassette close Cassette close Cross subdivision Cross subdivision Shutters Shutters Optional I. lift assembly when fitted. Compliance with this value makes it possible to ensure that the potmeter is not damaged mechanically as a result of a position that leads to exceed its mechanical stop.direct. If not. thus avoiding using the limits that often turn out to be critical. it will be shown how to measure the value to reach. this measurement is different from what is shown on the display.Lim 000 mm 560 mm 146 mm 463 mm -65. LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW/HIGH Value min max min max min max min max Movement direction Park direction Field direction Closes Opens Left (head end) Right (feet side) Towards opening Towards overlap (cross subdiv. it is intricate and difficult to make these measurements in practice. Lock the potmeter in position and store the value to memory.

2640 approx.950 approx.117 approx.3979 approx.3735 approx.3050 approx. Optional Iris collim.232 approx.334 approx.880 approx.3730 approx.3740 (Rev.3754 approx.790 approx.360 approx.330 approx.350 approx.3863 approx. Compressor Compressor Grid Grid Cassette close Cassette close Cross subdivision Cross subdivision Shutters Shutters Value min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max min max Movement direction Anticlockwise (head end) Clockwise (feet side) Left (head end) Right (feet side) Withdrawal / decrease Extension/ increase Withdrawal / decrease Extension/ increase Inside Outside LOW HIGH Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Descent/Rise Descent/Rise Park direction Field direction Closes Opens Left (head end) Right (feet side) Towards opening Towards overlap (cross subdiv.3160 approx.3520 approx.3762 approx.360 approx.3710 approx.3745 approx.341 approx.1880 approx.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data Cell 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 111 112 113 114 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 Movement Angulation Angulation Scan Scan Main beam Main beam Middle beam Middle beam Transversal tabletop Transversal tabletop SID SID Collimator width Collimator width Height collim. Optional Iris collim. 3) 10-7 APOLLO .) Potmeter value approx.205 approx.3370 approx.1430 approx. Height collim.

Repeat the operation for the maximum (feet side) and memorise in cell 102. Take the column towards the minimum (head side). At this point. select cell 101 and store to memory. the Spot Film Device support plate can be seen showing the column tilting reference marks. The limits of the angulation are obtained by bringing the upper edge of the column to correspond to reference lines on the Spot Film Device support.1.2 ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 – 102) To carry out this adjustment. it is necessary to remove the covers of the scan group. 3) . With a level goniometer it will be possible to carry out a further check of the soundness of the min and max positions reached. -40° +40° Reference marks Figure 10-1: ANGULATION potmeter adjustment (cells 101 – 102) APOLLO 10-8 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data 10.

SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data 10. Select cell 103 and memorise the minimum value. 2.0") 52mm (2. 3) 10-9 APOLLO . Move the carriage to the maximum position (feet side) and find the 1652 mm (65.0") Figure 10-2: SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 – 104) (Rev. 3. Remove the left-hand cover of the scan group. Store the value in the cell 104. 1652mm (65.1.3 SCAN potmeter adjustment (cells 103 – 104) Before starting the adjustment of this movement. The point to be reached is 52 mm (2. Remove the main beam's left-hand side cover. Move the scan towards the minimum position (head side) that must be found between the outer left-hand limit of the main beam and the side of the Spot Film Device base plate. you must: 1. This ensures that when the scan is moved over its full travel it does not create risks of collision between the II and the floor.0") measurement among the same references used for the minimum. Move the table into a horizontal position with the lift higher than the minimum position.0").

bring the II attachment plate to the high position. Move the main beam in such a way that there is access to the verification of the middle beam position. select cell 107 and memorise the minimum middle beam value. as for all the other adjustments. The movements cannot take place at the same time.4 MAIN BEAM and MIDDLE BEAM potmeter adjustment (cells 105 ÷ 108) When the main beam movement cells are select. the movement is enabled by the compressor joystick. To carry out the minimum main beam and middle beam adjustment. if a lift is present. while checking it with a bubble level (Figure 10-3). but the activation of one excludes the other. Move the middle beam downwards until it ends up flat.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data 10. it is necessary to remove the II and. Bubble level Figure 10-3: Minimum middle beam position (cell 107) APOLLO 10-10 (Rev. 3) . it is possible also to activate the middle beam movement by means of the SID joystick. Since just the main beam movement would make it impossible to reach some positions.1.

take the main beam towards the maximum until it is perpendicular to the ground. select the cell 106 and store the maximum value to memory. in such a way as it ends up flat. Bubble level Figure 10-5: Maximum main beam position (cell 106) (Rev. using a bubble level to check it is at right angles (Figure 10-5).SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data At this point bring the main beam downwards. Bubble level Figure 10-4: Minimum main beam position (cell 105) At this point. while checking with a bubble level (Figure 10-4). 3) 10-11 APOLLO . Select cell 105 and memorise the minimum main beam value.

9") Figure 10-6 APOLLO 10-12 (Rev. 3) .SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data WARNING: In the main beam and middle beam adjustment phase. It is therefore fundamental. to follow the instructions below to the letter. in addition to paying the utmost attention before and during the activation of the movements. in the second a manoeuvring error would cause irreparable damage to the main beam motor tube by bending it. At this point take the main beam towards the bottom until the extension of the mechanical tube reaches 430 mm (16. 430mm (16.9") (Figure 10-6) to be measured between the extreme limit of the actuator and the upper edge of the outside tube of the actuator. there are risks that could damage the equipment very seriously. In fact the combination of the main beam and middle beam movements carried out incorrectly could cause a collision between the structure of the main beam and the structure of the middle beam or a collision between the main beam motor tube and the structure of the middle beam. While in the first case the main beam-middle beam collision safety switch protects the equipment.

SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data Select cell 108 and take the middle beam towards the maximum until it is perpendicular to the ground. using a bubble level to check it is at right angles. Bubble level Figure 10-7: Maximum middle beam position (cell 108) (Rev. at this point store the maximum value to memory. 3) 10-13 APOLLO .

SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.5

TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment (cells 111 – 112)
Remove the main beam's left-hand side cover. Take the tabletop towards the minimum (inner) position that must be measured between the aluminium tabletop support arm fixing block and the horizontal surface of the tabletop movement tube. The distance to be reached is 270 mm (10.6"). Select the cell 111 and memorise the minimum value. Move the tabletop to the maximum position (feet side) and find the 590 mm (23.2") measurement between the same references used for the minimum. Store the value 112 in the cell.

270mm (10.6")

590mm (23.2")

Figure 10-8: TRANSVERSAL TABLETOP potmeter adjustment (cells 111 – 112)

APOLLO

10-14

(Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.6

SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment (cells 113 – 114)
Remove the rear SID cover. Take the tube holding arm towards the minimum position (low) that has to be found between the upper surface of the mobile aluminium column and the upper edge of the swinging column. The height to be reached is 42 mm (1.6"). Select cell 113 and memorise the minimum value. Move the tube holding arm to the maximum position (high) and find the 542 mm (21.3") measurement between the same references used for the minimum. Store the value in cell 114.

542mm 42mm (21.3") (1.6")

Figure 10-9: SOURCE TO FILM DISTANCE potmeter adjustment (cells 113 – 114)

(Rev. 3)

10-15

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.7

WIDTH COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 117 – 118)
The WIDTH limitation of the collimator means the limitation corresponding to the right and left of the patient. Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to 122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 980 mm (38.6") from table top surface (dimensions shown on the display). Select cell 117 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop. The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position. Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum that must be stored in position 118.

G

NOTE: The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted" will appear. When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.

Focus

980mm (38.6")

min = cell 117 max = cell 118

Figure 10-10: COLLIMATOR WIDTH potmeter adjustment (cells 117 – 118)

APOLLO

10-16

(Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.8

HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 119 – 120)
The HEIGHT limitation of the collimator means the limitation corresponding to the head and feet of the patient. Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to 122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 980 mm (38.6") from table top surface (dimensions shown on the display. Select cell 119 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop. The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position. Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum, that must be stored in position 120.

G

NOTE: The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted " will appear. When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.

Focus

Figure 10-11: HEIGHT COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 119 – 120)

(Rev. 3)

980mm (38.6") min = cell 119 max = cell 120

10-17

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.9

IRIS COLLIMATOR (optional accessory) potmeter adjustment (cells 121 – 122)
Iris potmeters will only be adjusted if the table is fitted with collimator to limit the square-rectangular and circular fields. Using the SID joystick, that allows this movement only when cells 117 to 122 are selected, bring X-ray spot at 980 mm (38.6") from table top surface (dimensions shown on the display). Select cell 121 and using the compressor joystick, close the collimator until the measurement displayed by the software is reached, that can be detected by measuring the illuminated field projected on the tabletop. The displayed measurement can vary according to the focus position. Repeat what has been described for the adjustment of the maximum that must be stored in position 122.

G

NOTE: The minimum value must always be adjusted before the maximum value otherwise alarm "089: The minimum has not been adjusted " will appear. When cells 117 to 122 are selected, the collimator light will come on automatically when the collimator movement joystick is pushed.

Focus

Figure 10-12: IRIS COLLIMATOR potmeter adjustment (cells 121 – 122)

APOLLO

980mm (38.6") min = cell 121 max = cell 122

10-18

(Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.10 COMPRESSION FORCE potmeter adjustment (cells 123 – 124)
To perform this adjustment a compression dynamometer with a range of 0 to 20 kg (0 to 44.1 lbs) is required. Move the tabletop into the centred position and rest the dynamometer on it. The minimum must be adjusted with no force applied to the cone; store the value in position 123. Bring the cone down until a pressure of 15.5 kg (34.2 lbs) as shown on the dynamometer is exerted; store the value in position 124.

(Rev. 3)

10-19

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.11 GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 – 126)
Remove the upper cover of the Spot Film Device. Move the grid holding frame towards the minimum position (park) that must be found between the grid centre and Spot Film Device centre line notch on the upper edge of the shoulders. The point to be reached is 460 mm (18.1"). Select cell 125 and memorise the minimum value. Move the small frame to the maximum position (field) and find the 50 mm (1.9") measurement among the same references used for the minimum. Store the value in cell 126.

460mm (18.1") 50mm (1.9")

Grid centre (park position) Centre line notch Grid centre (field position)

Figure 10-13: GRID potmeter adjustment (cells 125 – 126)

APOLLO

10-20

(Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data

10.1.12 CASSETTE CLOSE potmeter adjustment (cells 127 – 128)
Remove the upper lid of the Spot Film Device. Select cell 127 and operate the compressor joystick until the cassette close guides are fully closed and the gripping switch is not activated. Store the value. Select position 128 and widen the guides until the required measurement indicated on the display is achieved. Store the value. WARNING: The adjustment of the cassette tightening guide potmeter must be carried out with the scanning assembly for the cross subdivision perfectly centred. When the maximum is adjusted the greatest care must be taken to ensure the guides do not violently strike the walls of the Spot Film Device but just brush them slightly. Forcing the guides causes damage to the protection fuse F22 on the Spot Film Device PCB A4.

(Rev. 3)

10-21

APOLLO

1 CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment The gripping switch's job is to ensure a certain contact between the cassette and the driving belts.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data 10. Move the table into a vertical position. G APOLLO NOTE: The cassette to use must be one of those the radiology room is equipped with.12. the scale on the cam must coincide with the position 40° ±10° to be read from the graded scale on the volute. 3) .2 lbs). Insert a cassette with height side 24 cm (10") to make visible the reference scale when the switch is activated. This switch is ideally adjusted in order to get a pressure on the cassette guides of approximately 6 kg (13. To comply with this value. Graded scale Reference scale Figure 10-14: CASSETTE TIGHTENING switch adjustment Perform the following to check the correct functioning of the gripping system: 1. This is because the check must be done under the worst operating conditions (maximum weight in the lifting mode). perform the test with the heaviest format among those which are in use. Insert a 35x43 (14"x17") cassette (35/14" height side direction) resting it on the lower guide. If the 35x43 (14"x17") size is not used. 2. 10-22 (Rev.1.

An adjustment that is too high (> 7 kg / 15. If the adjustment is correct. 3) 10-23 APOLLO . WARNING: An adjustment that is not high enough (< 5 kg / 11. work on the switch activating cam to bring its intervention forward or delay it.4 lbs) causes pressure that is to great between the drive belts and cassette meaning the cassette has difficulty moving. the switch must never cut in while the cassette is moving upwards until both the guides are touching the cassette and an approximately 10° movement scale movement seen on the graded scale has been performed. (Rev. Operate the cassette insertion control.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data 3. If this is not the case.0 lbs) causes the switch to cut in early during the test described above.

Figure 10-15: CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 – 130) APOLLO 10-24 (Rev. store the value. store the value.13 CROSS SUBDIVISION potmeter adjustment (cells 129 – 130) Insert a cassette between the guides with height side 24 cm (10") on which there is a centre line and grip it. Select cell 129 and push the compressor joystick until the centre line of the cassette is 65 mm (2.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data 10.1. 3) . Select position 130 and repeat the operation in the opposite direction with respect to the centre line.6") away from the centre of the cassette resting surface.

store the value in cell 132. 475mm (18.14 SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cells 131 – 132) Remove the upper cover of the Spot Film Device.1. Take the shutters towards the minimum position (fully open) that corresponds with an opening equal to 475 mm (18.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data 10.3") Figure 10-17: SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cell 132) (Rev.7") Figure 10-16: SHUTTER potmeter adjustment (cell 131) Take the shutters towards the maximum position (overlapping) and read the measurement of 9 mm (0. 3) 10-25 APOLLO . select cell 131 and memorise the minimum value. 9mm (0.7") (Figure 10-16).3") (Figure 10-17).

APOLLO 10-26 (Rev.I.2"). lift to the upper end limit (switch S28). 3) .I.I. and internal SFD parts. The cams for end run microswitches position can be modified to obtain: • minimum distance between skin and I. • the coincidence between input I.I.I. By the compressor joystick move the I. Move the I. plain and film level to avoid parallax error due by oblique projections.15 I. lift microswitches adjustment (Optional) (cell 133) Check that: • measuring chamber is removed • grid in park position • cassettes jaws completely open.I.I.1.SERVICE MANUAL Access and adjustment of group 100 data 10. if necessary adjust the lower end run cam (switch S29). The distance between cassette jaw lower side and I. Check that during the movement does not happens any collision between I. lift up to lower end run. must be never less than 5 mm (0.

The control panel display will show: XXX YYYYYY Description of the cell set where: XXX YYYYYY = number of the group and the position = value currently in the memory. (Rev. respectively. When this time has elapsed. position the switch or switches of the dip-switch group on the CPU PCB. relating to the data group for which access is required. Press key MODE1 and hold it down for 1 sec. As said previously. at ON. Turn off the equipment. v Reading data 1. Press key MODE2. 2. The display will show the flashing message CORR that indicates it is possible to write the access code. 2. By pressing the MODE3 and TEST keys it is possible to increase and decrease the number of cells to be displayed. it is not possible to modify any settings. the display will show: 002 0000 Key in access code where: 002 0000 = number of the position for the input of the access codes = position for the access code (see chapter 9). v Data editing 1.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11 ACCESS AND DATA FUNCTION OF ALL GROUPS (EXCEPT GROUP 100) To access the reading of the data contained in the various groups (except for group 100) the following procedure must be followed. 3) 11-1 APOLLO . 3. Turn on the equipment.

press the MODE2 key. the flashing CORR message disappears. to the relative groups in function of which switches are positioned at ON. the flashing message CORR will appear on the display. This setting will appear by scrolling from right to left on the position for the inputting of the code. the following message appears on the screen. of the inputting of the last digit. 3) .ZZZ that indicates that it is possible to access groups. If the code is correct. If the code keyed in is wrong. To modify the data. By using the numeric keys key in the data required and press the MODE2 key again within 15 sec. instead: Code incorrect: access denied In this case. The display returns to the position of the group abandoned on entry to position 002. 4. the display will show the message: Access to groups XXX – YYY . if the confirmation key is pressed within the specified time. Press key MODE2 to confirm. However. thanks to the use of the code that has just been keyed in. what is written disappears from the displays and the non-edited data remains in the memory. At this point it will be possible to edit the data of the cells making up this group. hold key MODE1 down for one second. the operations must repeated from number 2. in this condition. to confirm the correction. become numbers in accordance with the schematic below. Set the code relative to this data group (see chapter 9) by means of the keys that. If the confirmation key is not pressed within 15 sec. APOLLO 11-2 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 3. 5.

SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11. the default data set during the table adjustment in the factory is shown in the second to last column in the table. (Rev. 3) 11-3 APOLLO . To ensure the installation functions properly the correct values must be input.1. 11. Default data input during factory testing is present in the various cells. The last column is for the service technician to take note any variations from the default data.1 Function of the parameters of group 200 As the data contained in the cells of this group can be modified to render the machine fit for the installation requirements.1 Group 200 – Installation data The values of this group is related to the installation of the equipment.

3) .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 11-4 (Rev.

The distance between the right wall and the table centre must be included in this data. The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distanced from the left and right walls that each element of the table can reach. vertical dimension mm 600 210 I. bottom half size mm 250 (Rev. 3) 11-5 APOLLO . Unit mm Default -3000 Setting 202 Right wall – table center distance mm 3000 203 204 205 206 207 208 Floor . The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distance from the ceiling that each component of the table can reach. This data determines the minimum distance that the II will be able to reach from the floor. when one side of the II enters this band. The size measured between the upper surface of the II (input screen zone) and the more distant lower part (TV camera coverage zone or angulation motor cover in case of 9” I. During tilting.table center distance Function description The distance between the left wall and the table centre must be included in this data.ceiling distance Floor-tube safety distance Ceiling safety distance Walls safety distance II-floor safety distance The ascend band II-floor collision mm mm mm mm mm mm 3000 200 200 200 100 60 209 I.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 201 Display Left wall .I.) The value to be stored must be that which corresponds to half of the measurement of the lower part of the II (typically the measurement of the television camera radius must be input). The value inserted in this field will determine the minimum distance from the floor that the X-ray tube can reach. The ascent band is ideally positioned over the value stored in cell 207. the movement is modified with respect to the way it operates normally to ensure the II gets out of the ascent band preventing it from reaching the safety zone (cell 207) by causing the machine to stop. Measure the distance between the floor and the ceiling bearing in mind the lowest point in the movement of the X-ray tube. The table centre corresponds to the centre of the tabletop measured when flat. The table centre corresponds with the centre of the tabletop measured when flat.I.I.

Include the nominal measurement of the medium II field (medium enlargement). 3) . Insert the rated value of the I.4") from the tube attachment shaft. If a four-field II is installed the field value must be input with minimum enlargement.4"). This data is only used by the software when cell 252 is set at 1 (four-field II). Remember however that since the rear end of the tube holding arm is 340 mm (13. Typically the point corresponds with the collimator sharp edge furthest from the shaft.I. minimum field I.I. Include the nominal measurement of the minimum II field (maximum enlargement).I. of the maximum and on the II formats. It has no influence on the opening of the minimum. max field for 4 fields Width-height collimator format correct mm mm 410 0 219 Cassette exposure position correction If it is necessary to modify the exposure positioning runs of cassettes of the same number. rated field in the case of a three-field intensifier. the minimum data that can be put in is 340 mm (13. radius if not at The height to key into this cell must be that which was measured 0° between the tube attachment shaft and the furthest point from the tubecollimator assembly. mm 350 213 214 215 216 mm mm mm mm 0 158 250 312 217 218 I. In this case insert the value of the nominal II field. 0 – MAX position distance by grid This data makes it possible to centre the grid on the rays perfectly.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 211 Display Tube equivalent radius at 0° Function description The half width of the hood value must be stored to memory. Focus . The data inserted determines the distance between the potmeter maximum and the 0 grid position.tube shaft distance I.I. Unit mm Default 340 Setting 212 Casing/collimator eq.I. medium field I. mm 0 220 mm 50 APOLLO 11-6 (Rev. This data makes it possible to modify the opening of the collimator in the radiography collimations. the correction value required must be input into this cell. max field Input the vertical distance between the focus position and the tube fixing pin.

the more precise the positioning with relation to the end runs (min. 0. The data depends on the generator characteristics and it is advisable to use the smallest possible values to avoid delays between X-ray request and the response. Since the grid performs an oscillation during the exposure. A compromise value must be inserted between these two effects to optimise the movement of the transversal tabletop. The value to be input in this cell will be activated for the set point of the compression force. set by means of the control panel keys. that once reached turns off the movement. This data makes it possible to synchronise the movement of the grid with X-rays exposure.5 (Rev. max and centering) but the risk of movement oscillations increases around the set point when the stop is requested. The dead band is the "the window" around the set point. The smaller this value is. The value to be input into this cell will be activated for the SID movement at the min and the max. the total oscillation has a value that is equal to double the half run calculated from the 0 point. The data inserted determines the distance between the potmeter minimum and the grid parking position. 3) 11-7 APOLLO . See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. Since the grid oscillates symmetrically around point 0. See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. when applied to the patient.00 224 Transversal tabletop dead band mm 2 225 SID dead band mm 2 226 Compression force dead band kg 0.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 221 Display Park – MIN distance by grid Function description This data makes it possible to position the grid properly in the park. the value in this cell makes it possible to determine the total value of this oscillation. Unit mm Default 10 Setting 222 Total grid oscillation length mm 20 223 Exposure delay after grid start sec.

max. The data to be inserted in this cell is therefore intimately bound to the data of the dead band. See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. This data must be input with maximum care because too small a value will determine a collision between the guides and the walls of the Spot Film Device risking a breakage of the motor protection fuse while too great a value will make the loading of the 43 size cassette difficult. Unit mm Default 2 Setting 228 Gripping dead band mm 6 229 Width collimator dead band mm 2 230 231 232 Collimator height dead band Iris collimator dead band Width collimator slow down band mm mm mm 2 2 15 APOLLO 11-8 (Rev. The value to be input into this cell will be active for the grid movement at the min. The description for cell 229 is valid but applied to the height collimation axis. The description for cell 229 is valid but applied to the iris collimation axis. on II sizes and at the min and the max. See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 227 Display Grid dead band Function description See the description of cell 224 for the definition of the dead band. Thanks to this slowing down (implemented by a hardware circuit) it will be possible to set very small dead bands (thereby enhancing position precision) thereby avoiding oscillations caused by speed of high positions. The value to be inserted in this cell will be active for the cassette guide movement only at the maximum opening. 3) . This data determines the change of movement speed of the movement in the axis before the dead band is reached. The slow down band is positioned around the dead band of collimator width axis. The value to insert in this cell shall be active for the movement of the base axis of the collimator for all the automatic collimation positions on cassette sizes. 0 and the limits of the movement in oscillation.

If the table is used for stepping angiograph tests. the data inserted in this cell determines the height of the tabletop for m the ground when the stepping angio mode entrance procedure is finished. However to get a slight overlap between one step and the next. when tilt or centre joystick are activated. The average value of this speed must be inserted in this cell after having calculated it as described in cell 262. This value sets the SID position automatically readed when the Tomography function is completed.). To recognise such an error however the logic must know the average speed of the tabletop movement in all its conditions. The length of the step can be reduced in percentage terms through the data that is placed in this cell. What is described for cell 235 applies. The length of the step in angio step mode depends on the II field selected.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 233 234 235 Display Height collimator slow down band Iris collimator slow down band Transversal tabletop average speed Function description The description for the width collimation applies (cell 232). It will therefore be possible for the logic to monitor an excessive position error caused by a mechanical defect (movement /potmeter coupling etc. the logic is not able to correct the speed. it is necessary for the length of the step is lightly shorter with regard to the II diameter. 3) 11-9 APOLLO . Since the transversal tabletop is not controlled by PDI logic but by an on/off movement with potmeter feedback only for position monitoring. With datum 0 the table height is the same when horizontal position is reached by acting tilt or lift down joystick. that helps in the reconstruction of the contrast liquid passage. Unit mm mm mm/s Default 15 15 54 Setting 236 237 238 SID average speed SID height after tomo Angio table lift default position mm/s cm mm 25 100 1100 239 II diam percentage per angio step % 90 240 Min height with tilt joystick mm 0 (Rev. The description for the width collimation applies (cell 232). This datum define the table height increment from the floor in comparison with the minimum position.

size − cassettes subdivision. Activation of the three relative outputs.2Cu).I. 4 = collimator additional filters visualisation (+0 . This correction is not present on: − I.4=D 5=RU¤ Depending on the country where the system is installed. With regard to the display of the service programs (functions that can be accessed through the dip-switches) there are two languages: Italian with selection = 0. This applies to all the messages that are displayed during the regular operation of the equipment. pos.coll 0 247 0=I .3=E . it is possible to choose what language the messages will be displayed in. Unit mm Default 0 Setting 246 0=disab 1=filters 2=puls 3=zone 4=f. 2 = mode display (pulsed – continuous). Dependent on the TV chain installed on the table or at the presence of a collimator with motorised additional filters selection and the requirements of the operators.+1Al . Activation of the output corresponding to CCDx0 when "large" is displayed. Activation of the three relative outputs. 0 APOLLO 11-10 (Rev.1=GB . Activation of the output corresponding to CCDx0 when “pulsed” is displayed 3 = ROI display (large – small).2=F . 3) .+0. for fluoro reduction Function description This setting is used to correct the shutters position from the width collimator when a reduction by joystick is activated.1Cu +0.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 241 Display Shutters corr. it is possible to configure the dedicated key function and the relative outputs. English for all the other selections. There are five functions: 0 = disabled function 1= filter display (CCDx0 – CCDx2 – CCDx4 – CCDx8).

Press key F3. Press the MODE2 key to enable the correction. (Rev. 3) 11-11 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) The cells in group 200 after those already listed are used to make the setting choices and not introduce numerical data like the previous ones. After this operation. 2. The data present is automatically replaced with the alternative. the writing CORR disappears and the data is confirmed in EEprom. The display will show the flashing message CORR. In these fields a choice is requested between values 0 or 1 to establish the setting choice. Do the following to modify the input data: 1.

3) .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 11-12 (Rev.

I. I. The table is designed to allow the implementation of a safety device to prevent the entrapment of parts between internal tabletop profiles and SFD rear side and between column and SFD lateral side. As an option. field selection 0 = no 1 = yes Iris collimator 0 = no 1 = yes Anti entrapment device 1= 1 The data depends on the II installed. 0 0 254 0 255 0=pres. lift. All Digital version does not carry I. If this circuit is installed it will be necessary to activate the relative input software control using this setting. Typically the 4 field selection is for 16” II. 3) 11-13 APOLLO . 0= 1 3 2 4 Default 0 Setting 251 0=foot-head 1=head-foot Cross subdivision sequence 0 3 4 2 252 253 0=3 fields 1=4 II fields I.I.I.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 250 Display 0 = no 1 = yes Collimator hold mode default Function description This setting determines whether when the equipment is turned on or each time the "automatic collimator" mode is selected. This determines the succession of radiograms for the cross subdivisions. 1=abs. When this option is present the value must be 0. the table can be fitted with an II lift device to bring it towards the tabletop in digital fluoroscopic mode (dependent on the setting of cell 256). lift 1 (Rev. The C-CSA-US versions are always equipped with this circuit. the Hold function is active by default or whether it must be activated by the operator by pushing the relative key. This depends on the configuration of the table configuration that can make provision for a collimator with square/rectangular filed or square/rectangular field with iris.

If this setting is not consistent the motor will hit the floor during tilting with the scanning close to its range limit. the above will be reversed. The angulation motor will be mounted on the left side when the vertical position will be on the right side and viceversa. Selecting 0 (vertical on the right – Trendelenbourg on the left) the display will show positive angles when tilting to the right. Default 0 Setting 257 258 0 = cm 1 = inch Cassette type 0 = right side 1 = left side Table vertical position 0 0 259 0=off-off 1=off-on Horizontal image scan reverse 1 APOLLO 11-14 (Rev.8") from the centre instead of 800 mm (31. The selection depends on the cassettes that are available. The mode enhances the quality of the image but delays the fluoro-exposure passage time.5") when the tilting angle is between –5° and –80°. The setting of this parameter must always be consistent with the angulation motor. Depending on the room where the table is installed.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 256 Display 0 = no 1 = yes I. the "vertical position" can be on the right or left side. The value to be keyed in this cell determines whether the approach also occurs when the fluoro is requested. Selection 0 determines that when the table is turned on both the dedicated key led and the relative output are Off. 4) . Selecting 1.I. selection 1 determines the automatic activation of the output with the led of the relative key off. it might be necessary to activate the horizontal image scan reverse output by default. By pressing the key the led is turned on and the output is activated. Dependent on the type of TV chain installed. When the table is on. The scanning will have a run limited to 350 mm (13. lift go up in fluoro Function description If the I.I. lift option is present (cell 255) the II is always brought towards the table when the digital mode is selected. When the horizontal image scan reverse key is pressed the led comes on and the output is turned off.

Otherwise the value shown is not real. the various values noted and the average obtained. It disables the Spot Film Device controls. The activation determines the display of the message "SERVICE FUNCTION ACTIVE" and enables the following procedures that can be used for service and control operations. This can be activated if the Spot Film Device breaks down to exclude alarms and any disabling. Exclusion of the collimator limitation and the Spot Film Device shutters The collimator and the Spot Film Device shutters do not perform the limitation on the II or cassette size thereby permitting any checks and measurements to be made on the Spot Film Device or the exposed films. 3) 11-15 APOLLO . The speed in all load conditions and position of the equipment must be checked. 0 (Rev. The measurement of the speeds only must to be done if the movement potmeters have already been adjusted. This override is present when the table is in the “All digital” version. The initialisation functions and all the relative modes are no longer performed. Display of the instant speeds By activating the movement of the tabletop or the SID the speed is visualised thanks to the potmeter feedback. The values that can be obtained in this way must be inserted in cell 235 for transversal tabletop and 236 for the SID. Default 0 0 Setting 262 0=normal 1=Technical service function In standard operating mode this function must always be deactivated.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 260 261 Display 0=off-off 1=off-on Vertical image scan reverse 0=enable 1=disable Spot Film Device disabling To be set at 1 in "All Digital" version Function description What was described for cell 259 is valid here applied to the vertical image scan reverse function.

Default 0 0 0 Setting APOLLO 11-16 (Rev. It reverses the image on the monitor right-left high-low when the function ‘monitor orienting’ is selected.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 263 264 265 Display 0=high –high 1=high -low 0=right-right 1=right left 0=cm–kg 1=inch-lbs Parameters visualization Function description It reverses the image on the monitor high-low when the function ‘monitor orienting’ is selected. 4) . layer and compression force data visualization in cm-kg or inch-lbs. Sets the SID.

The speed and acceleration values used for the generation of the theoretical trajectory are those inserted in the relative cells.2.2 Group 300 – PDI controlled motor data This group contains the values linked to the operation of the motors controlled using the PDI (proportional.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11.1 Theory of functioning of an axis with PID control To move an axis. integral) method. Default data input during factory testing is present in the various cells. To reach the arrival point it is therefore necessary to describe a trajectory. Having the departure point as the origin. a stretch of acceleration that rises steadily linearly – a stretch of constant speed – a deceleration ramp with acceleration equal to the acceleration ramp but with a negative sign. (Rev. This variable is called the theoretical trajectory. • Generation of the trajectory The software constructs a variable that represents the point where the movement should be moment by moment. The arrival point is determined by the choice made when a movement is selected. the generation of the theoretical trajectory consists of: – a ramp. The departure point is known because it corresponds with the position in which the axis is. 11. To perform the movement it will therefore be necessary for the software to carry out two separate functions: • the generation of the trajectory • following the trajectory. derived. thoroughly. This data is essential for the proper functioning of the equipment. i. the control software must know: • the departure point of the movement • the point of arrival. The brief explanation given below is useful to better understand the function of the various cells present for each of the motors controlled using this system. 3) 11-17 APOLLO . This trajectory will be created thanks to the data inserted in the cells containing the speed and acceleration values. its function and the possible consequences.e. Before varying any data of this program whatsoever it is important to understand its meaning.

This signal will be modulated in such a way as to approximate the theoretical trajectory as closely as possible.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) • Following the trajectory The following of the theoretical trajectory constructs a variable that generates the real trajectory. 3) . The sum of all these errors sampled will be algebraic. This variable will then be translated into the reference signal (Vref). The sum of the errors will therefore be a number that is accumulated during the accomplishment of the whole trajectory. The error can take a negative and positive value according to whether the real trajectory is before or after the theoretical one. – the integral gain is inserted in the dedicated cell. that is to say. This variable is the sum of three components: – Proportional The proportional part is product of the multiplication: "instantaneous error" X "proportional gain" where: – the instantaneous error is given by the difference between the real position (monitored by the feed back of the potmeter or encoder) and that theoretical (calculated by the generation of the trajectory) – the proportional gain is inserted in the dedicated cell. – Integral The integral part is product of the multiplication: "sum of the errors" X "integral gain" where: – the sum of the errors is obtained by the sampling conducted every millisecond that calculates the positioning error between the real trajectory and the theoretical one. it will take the error's negative or positive sign into account. APOLLO 11-18 (Rev. sent to the activation that controls the axis motor.

e. If the data set in this cell is 0 no limitation will be performed. So far the following fields have been analysed: • Proportional gain • Integral gain • Period of derivative sampling • Derivative gain Here below is a brief analysis of the remaining fields responsible for the control of a PDI axis. it will be limited in accordance with the limit set. The position error. This interval expressed in msec. 3) 11-19 APOLLO . – the derivative gain is inserted in the dedicated cell. • (Rev. If the sum of the errors exceeds the value set in this cell. i. This parameter avoids action that is too extreme in the case that the sum assumes values that are considerable. The difference between the error detected in a sampling and the error detected in the next sampling shows the extent to which the actual trajectory has changed its position with respect to the theoretical one. the movement will be stopped. the difference between the real and the theoretical trajectories. is calculated on the basis of an interval time that must be set in the dedicated cell.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) – Derivative The derivative part is the product of the multiplication: "error difference between 2 samplings" X "derivative gain" where: – the error difference between samplings. is called "derivative sampling period". is calculated at each sampling. Motor STOP error When the difference between the actual and the theoretical position of a movement reaches a value that is equal to the one set in the cell. • Integration limit This is the maximum value that the sum of the integral action errors can assume.

By inserting the value 0 the movement is never stopped. The time inserted into these cells is equal to the time the motion employs to pass from the actual speed to 0 in a linear way. This braking modality is used for the following movements: main beam. scan and angulation. • APOLLO 11-20 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) • Delay motor turning off This delay is the time after which. middle beam. the integral position recovery actions are not carried out and the motor turning off delay does not have effect. at the end of the run. This allows the integral action to complete its function. This time allows to make up for a possible real positioning error as opposed to a theoretical one. Braking time This value permits to ramp down the motion independently of the acceleration ramp. In this case. the motor is turned off. 3) . This occurs regardlessly of the real position with respect to the theoretical one.

contain the data relative to the various PDI-controlled motors. Angulation movement Cell 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 Function Period derivative sampl.0 50.2 Motors check data function The following tables.0 33.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11.5 Set (Rev.001 600 0 800 20 5 150 300 300 250 300 30 100 0.1 15.2. 4) 11-21 APOLLO .0 42.0 25.0 5 0. Proportional gain Integral gain Derivative gain Integration limit (°) 1st (°/sec) joystick and tomo speed 2nd (°/sec) tomo speed 3rd (°/sec) tomo speed 4th (°/sec) tomo speed 1st (°/sec) joystick and tomo acceleration 2nd (°/sec) tomo acceleration 3rd (°/sec) tomo acceleration 4th (°/sec) tomo acceleration Error stop motor (°) Braking time (sec) Default 0. Proportional gain Integral gain Derivative gain Integration limit (mm) Joystick initial speed (mm/sec) Joystick final speed (mm/sec) Angio step speed (mm/sec) Angio return speed (mm/sec) Joystick acceleration and angio return (mm/sec2) Angio step acceleration (mm/sec2) Joystick speed increment (mm/sec2) Error stop motor (mm) Braking time (sec) Default 0.0 23.001 200 0 200 20 11.5 Set Scan movement Cell 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 332 Function Period derivative sampl.0 19. divided by motor.

0 25 (*) 6.4 Set The data inserted into the cells can be with different values in function of the mechanical characteristics of the unit.0 Group 2 500 7 350 4.0 70 80 0.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Main beam and middle beam movement (tilting and lift) Cell 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 349 (*) Function Period derivative sampl.0 1200.2 3.0 100 0.001 (*) (*) (*) 10 (*) 6.50 Set APOLLO 11-22 (Rev.001 2000 50 3000 50.0 300.5 Shutters movement Cell 353 354 355 356 357 358 360 361 362 363 364 Function Period derivative sampl. 3) .5 4.8 Group 3 400 5 300 4. As default data can be set 3 different groups: Cell 336 337 338 340 343 Group 1 600 10 400 4.0 3. Proportional gain Integral gain Derivative gain Integration limit Low tilting speed (°/sec) High tilting speed (°/sec) Lift manual speed (mm/sec) Slow tilting speed acceleration (°/sec2) High tilting speed acceleration (°/sec2) Lift acceleration (mm/sec2) Error stop motor (mm) Braking time (sec) Default 0. Proportional gain Integral gain Derivative gain Integration limit (mm) Initialisation speed (mm/sec) Work speed (mm/sec) Initialisation speed acceleration (mm/sec2) Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2) Error stop motor (mm) Delay turning off motor (sec) Default 0.0 100.0 100.

001 2000 50 4000 50.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cassette movement Cell 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 Function Period derivative sampl.0 30.0 25.0 300. Proportional gain Integral gain Derivative gain Integration limit Initialisation speed (mm/sec) Work speed (mm/sec) Initialisation speed acceleration (mm/sec2) Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2) Error stop motor (mm) Delay turning off motor (sec) Default 0.0 2000.0 12. 3) 11-23 APOLLO .001 1100 50 2500 10. Proportional gain Integral gain Derivative gain Integration limit (mm) Access speed (until cassette size photosens.50 Set Cross subdivision movement Cell 389 390 391 392 393 395 396 397 398 399 400 Function Period derivative sampl.0 600.0 400.0 0.0 90.0 950.) (mm/sec) IN-OUT speed (mm/sec) Work speed (mm/sec) Access and IN-OUT speed acceleration (mm/sec2) Working speed acceleration (mm/sec2) Error stop motor (mm) Delay turning off motor (sec) Default 0.0 8000 200 0.50 Set (Rev.

3. APOLLO 11-24 (Rev. 3) .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11. Moreover. it will be necessary to check if the movement mechanics can sustain such variation. The function of the various cells is listed in the following tables divided by groups. To vary the value of the set default data means to adjust the movement run range. The software will divide the new run range by the number of potmeter's points that are going to be sampled between the minimum and maximum value of the new run.1 Range of runs carried out by movements with potmeter feedback As explained in the chapter about potmeters adjustment. 11. This will entail: • the variation of the equipment specification • the adjustment of the potmeter minimum and maximum calibration • the adjustment of the emergency switches position. WARNING: Do not modify the data in this group as they are linked to the operative characteristic of the equipment. the limit to reach for the calibration is shown on the display. This limit is set in this block of data.3 Group 400 / 500 / 600 – Dimensions and runs This group contains data that have various functions.

Software minimum end of run position for SID movement (Rev.: minimum pos. For all the others selections. Data selectable is between –20° and –90°. if data sets is between –87° and –90°. when end limit is reached.0 -800 800 135 135 -88 Setting 410 411 412 413 414 Maximum vertical position Transv. tabletop: maximum position Tube shaft . It might be necessary to modify such limit to increase the comfort for the patient or to limit the tilting range. alwais –90°. the display will shows. the value displayed at the end limit could be different then the stored one. It holds the same as for cell 409 with the difference that this value has an influence on the vertical position with positive tilting angles. 4) 11-25 APOLLO .0 40.film dist. due to the stop dead band.film dist.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 401 402 403 404 405 407 409 View Angulation: minimum position Angulation: maximum position Scan: minimum position Scan: maximum position Main beam: minimum position Middle beam: minimum position Maximum Trendelembourg position Function description Software minimum end of run position for angulation movement Software maximum end of run position for angulation movement Software minimum scan position for angulation movement Software maximum scan position for angulation movement Software minimum main beam position for angulation movement Software minimum end of run position for middle beam movement The main beam and middle beam potmeters adjustment determines the minimum Trendelembourg position equal to –90°.: max position ° mm mm mm mm 88 -160 160 1016 1516 Tube shaft . Software minimum end of run position for tabletop movement Software maximum end of run position for tabletop movement Software maximum end of run position for SID movement Unit ° ° mm mm mm mm ° Default -40. tabletop: minimum position Transv.

Calibration is similar to what described in cell 415.5 000 510 146 463 -65. 3) .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 415 View Minimum main beam forced setting Function description Unit Default (XXX) Setting 416 417 418 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 In this cell is it is possible to force-set the minimum value of the main beam movement potmeter. The same previous difference between the two values shall be applied.0 65.5 15. to perform the calibration. in the case that it is not possible to reach the normal maximum position due to limitations of the room. Maximum main beam forced setting In this cell is it is possible to set manually the maximum value of the main beam movement potmeter.0 0. it will be necessary to calculate the data to input by checking the difference between the previously stored minimum and maximum values and the value corresponding to the maximum of the new calibration.0 495. To correctly perform this calibration procedure.0 APOLLO 11-26 (Rev.I. This avoids removing the I. Minimum middle beam forced setting It holds the same as for the main beam movement (cell 415) Maximum middle beam forced It holds the same as for the main beam movement (cell 416) setting Compression force: minimum Software minimum end of run position for compression force Compression force: maximum Software maximum end of run position for compression force Grid: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for grid movement Grid: maximum position Software minimum end of run position for grid movement Gripping: minimum size Software minimum end of run position for gripping movement Gripping: maximum size Software maximum end of run position for gripping movement Cross subdivision: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for cross subdivision movement Cross subdivision: maximum Software maximum end of run position for cross subdivision movement position Shutters: minimum position Software minimum end of run position for shutters movement Shutters: maximum position Software maximum end of run position for shutters movement (XXX) (XXX) (XXX) kg kg mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 01. Example: previous Mx = 3600 min = 500 difference = 3100 New max value = 3450 new val to input = 350 obtained applying the 3100 difference to the new max value.

3) 11-27 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11.2 Equipment mechanical dimensions This block of data contains some mechanical dimensions characteristic of this equipment.). tomography. The software uses these dimensions to perform calculations of the various functions' management algorithms (anti-collision. lifting and tilting functions. etc.3. WARNING: These data are closely linked to the equipment and therefore should never be modified in order to avoid modifications to the equipment functioning. (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 11-28 (Rev. 3) .

I.-film (fixed or lift. sensor. I. main beam shaft – I. The value is used for the collimation and for the calculation of the scan run for inclined projections and for the tomography. lift and it is the distance between the film and the I. lift and for fixed I. The value is used to calculate the collision. I. equipment and it represents the distance between the film and the I. It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the main beam right limit. The value is used to correctly perform the collimation.I. Unit mm Default 1016 Setting 434 435 436 437 438 439 441 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 83 500 1920 206 64 82 64 -19 (see NOTE) 18 (see NOTE) 12 442 Dist. This value is used both in the presence of the I. tube shaft-angulation shaft (SID=1000) Distance vert.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 433 View Dist. sensor. It is used to calculate the collision. sensor Distance main beam shaft . This value is used only in the presence of the I. It is the distance between the tabletop and the film.main beam left side distance Distance main beam shaft . It is the distance on the vertical axis between the main beam fixing pin and the input I. (Rev. The value is used to calculate the collision. It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the column rotation pin.I. It refers to the distance on the vertical axis between the main beam fixing pin and the main beam upper limit. The data is used to calculate the layer in the tomo modality.I. It is the distance between the main beam fixing pin and the main beam left limit. sensor when the lift is in the upper position. The correct value will ensure the correspondence between the set layer and the real one in the Digital tomo modality and for the inclined projections. The value is used for the collimation and for the calculation of the scan run for inclined projections and tomography.upper main beam Distance curved tabletop – film Distance flat tabletop – film Distance main beam shaft angulation shaft Dist.I.I. 3) 11-29 APOLLO . vert.I. main beam shaft . This data must be input with the SID on the minimum.-film (lift. It is the distance between the film and the shutters inside the Spot Film Device.down) mm 443 NOTE: Distance film .shutters mm These values will need to be modified in accordance with the dimension and the type of installed I.main beam right side distance Dist.up) Function description It refers to the distance between the mount shaft of the right tube and the rotation pin of the column. The value is used to calculate the collision. The value is used to calculate the collision.I..I.I.

3) .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 444 View Distance park . It is used to correctly position the cassette in the parking position. size photosens. middle beam shaft floor Distance between the middle beam shafts mm mm 605 1420 APOLLO 11-30 (Rev. Unit mm Default 472 Setting 445 446 Distance vert. The value is used to calculate the collision. Function description The present value corresponds to the distance between the parking and the cassette size photosensor. It is the distance between the base-middle beam and main beam-middle beam mount shafts. It is the distance on the vertical axis between the middle beam mount shaft and the floor.cass. The value is used to calculate the collision.

SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11. A detailed description of the functions is reported in each cell.3. (Rev. 3) 11-31 APOLLO .3 Data relative to single fault potmeter controls This block of data is used to check the potmeters and the functions linked to single faults.

3) .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 11-32 (Rev.

1. The number to store in this cell must take into account possible movements caused by the momentum of inertia after the movement arrest. The measurement unit is expressed in "potmeter points". In this cell the collimator. This is done in order to guarantee the Single Fault safety. a cell is available for each movement (see following cells). 3) 11-33 APOLLO . If the error takes on a value equal to the one stored in this cell. a value corresponding to the unit after the AD conversion. an error will indicate the discrepancy between the real and the theoretical position. Spot Film Device and compressor movements potmeters are checked.1). alarm 220 will be displayed. the average speed is stored in cell 236 and in case the error value is reached. in other words. alarm 218 is issued. With respect to the SID movement. The greater this value the wider the movement carried out with request prior to the processor displaying the alarm. 300 (Rev. It holds the same as for the transversal tabletop movement. As the real speed will never be identical to the stored speed. This error will be reset once the movement is stopped.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 447 View Max error for transversal tabletop Function description The value in cell 235 represents the average speed for the transversal tabletop movement (see paragraph 11. For potentially "dangerous" movements potmeters. during the movement. Unit mm Default 200 Setting 448 Max error for SID mm 200 449 Max error for stopped potmeters n/4096 The processor checks that the movements' potmeters do not undergo variations if the same movements are not active.

Max error for stopped middle beam pot. SID stopped Cross subdivision displacement (head side) This cell's value refers to the extra-runs that the potmeter can carry out n/4096 in proximity of the software range without generating an alarm.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Cell 450 View Extra-run max pot.0 APOLLO 11-34 (Rev. mm main beam See cell 452 applied to the main beam movement. ° angulation pot.0 460 Cross subdivision displacement (feet side) mm 60.S. mm See cell 452 applied to the middle beam movement. The value is expressed in degrees and it is the maximum involuntary movement allowed without generating an alarm. an alarm will be generated indicating the excessive proximity of the potmeter to the limits. is equal to the window inside which a single fault alarm is generated (231 or 232) in case there is no correspondence between the activation and single fault circuits.0 15 15 15 15 15 -60. See cell 452 applied to the scan movement. . during the extra run. sec corresp. The time value set in this cell. out of SW range Function description Unit Default 50 Setting 451 Max time of joyst. The value to be stored in this cell determines the displacement that the cross subdivision movement will perform toward the head side with respect to the central position.F. See cell 452 applied to the SID movement. See cell 452 applied to the transversal tabletop movement. It holds the same as for cell 459 as to the displacement towards the feet side. with measuring unit expressed in sec. mm mm mm mm 5. If the potmeter exceeds. Max error for stopped transversal tabletop pot. This extra run can be caused. scan pot. All this permits to detect if the potmeter circuit is interrupted when powering on. 3) . by dead bands. not 452 Max error for stopped 453 454 455 456 457 459 Max error for stopped Max error for stopped pot. It holds the same as for cell 449 applied to the angulation movement. the value set in this cell. Max error for pot. It is present the data relative to the check of correspondence of the activation and single faults circuits. for instance.00 1..

3) 11-35 APOLLO . the runs and the relative cells are summed up in tables where the first number indicates the cell number and the second.3. G NOTE: The cassette and shutters positioning might not correspond to the measure in the relative cell because of the mechanical inertia of the system. For rapid consultation and interpretation. (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11. in brackets. it is possible to modify these values. In case the separating lines of the X-rays of some subdivisions are not perfect. by following closely the instructions reported in the dedicated chapter. In every way the correction in mm introduced in the cells has an increment and decrement effect in the final amount equal to the value of the correction.4 Spot Film Device cassette and shutters run This block contains the runs carried out by the Spot Film Device cassette and shutters to perform the various cassettes subdivisions and the relative limitation. the stored data in mm.

(3/8 film) and (1/8 film) APOLLO 11-36 (Rev.0") figure is such as the distance of the photosensor from the bottom of the Spot Film Device (cell 444) is 472 mm (18.9") • the distance of the cassette size photosensor from the internal side of the Spot Film Device (484 mm / 19.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11. is carried out automatically by the software which increases the distances in the table of 15 mm (0.8") from the bottom when caming back from a preparation or test run G NOTE: Distances given in the tables an stored in the cells are referred to a parking position of the cassette at 20 mm (0. when the same is in the parking position.0") The 484 mm (19. Note that it is possible to store a new negative or positive offset value (cell 219) to compensate the differences due to manufacturing or operating characteristics. The formulas applied to determine the runs are as follows: • Full size C = (cassette width / 2) – 711 where 711 = 227 + 484 • Subdivision 2 in line and 4 cross C = full size run +/. This offset will permit to modify all runs of all subdivisions of the stored quantity.1 Calculation of the cassette run The calculation is based on the distance of cassette internal side.3.2") from the bottom.2") from the bottom at the end of cassette insertion • 20 mm (0.8") from the bottom of the Spot Film Device. with respect to centre of the Spot Film Device.(film / 4) • • Subdivision 3 in line and 6 cross C = full size run +/. Such distance is divided into 2 parts: • the distance of the cassette size photosensor from the centre of the Spot Film Device (227 mm / 8.4. when the parking position is at 5 mm (0.(film / 3) Subdivision 4 in line C = full size run +/. 3) .6") but the cassette parking position is set by the SW at: • 5 mm (0.6"). The correction.

5) 499 (617.0) 466 (547.5) 536 (466.5) 473 (442.0) 467 (486. 4 L (622.5) 533 (367.0) 464 (530.5) 523 (567.5) 491 (367.3) 489 (615.0) 479 (441.7) 493 (334.5) 534 (567.0) 468 (606.0) 479 (441.5) 503 (370.5) 513 (343.8) 462 (576.2) 464 (530.0) 505 (606.0) 477 (616.0) 492 (565.2) 668 (610.5) 470 (490.5) 463 (575.3) 484 (517.5) 530 (614.5) 473 (442.0) 471 (607.8) 539 SUBDIV.0) 504 (487.3) 517 (592.7) 535 (335.5) 515 (308. 2 L (531.5) 515 (307.3) 464 SUBDIV.0) 473 (442.0) 467 (486.0) 474 (592.0) 514 (557.0) 498 (515.0) 483 (616.0) 472 (516.0) 465 (620.0) 467 (486.0) 485 (442.0) 481 (416.5) 482 (516.0) 475 (415.0) (Rev.2) 540 (516. 4 L (417.3) 511 (606.5) 477 (616.0) 520 (617.0) 476 (516.5) 478 (516. 3 L 476 (516.0) 466 (547.3) 505 (606.0) 475 (415.0) 521 (467. 4) 11-37 APOLLO .6) 665 (287.0) 497 (417.5) 502 (577.0) 468 (606.7) 531 (590.3) 512 (451.5) 474 (592.0) 477 SUBDIV.0) 468 (606.0) 481 (416.3) 528 (417.5) 516 (450.5) 525 (466.3) 503 (370.0) 526 (599.0) 527 (317.0) 463 (576.0) 465 SUBDIV.0) 500 (489.0) 478 (516.0) 480 (591.5) 504 (487.0) 468 (606.0) 667 (502.0) 524 (335.0) SUBDIV.5) 516 (451.5) 495 (599.0) 496 (316.5) 510 (487.0) 476 (516.5) 487 (417. 6 L (616.0) 474 (592.0) 537 (599.8) 541 (614.0) 519 (517.5) 467 (486.5) 509 (370.5) 488 (517.3) 517 (593.5) 465 (620.0) 469 (547.5) 501 (400.5) 501 (400.0) 512 (450.0) 494 (467.3) 666 (395.0) 508 (577.0) 507 (400.5) 502 (577.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Table cassette run for cassettes in cm 13x18 18x13 18x24 24x18 24x24 24x30 30x24 30x30 18x43 43x18 15x40 40x15 20x40 40x20 30x35 35x30 30x40 40x30 35x35 35x43 43x35 PAN 461 (600.5) 532 (466.0) 475 (415.5) 500 (489.0) 513 (342.0) 506 (489.0) 480 (591.0) 482 (516.0) 529 (516.5) 518 (565.5) 514 (557.5) 522 (367.8) 538 (317.0) 490 (467.0) 486 (592.0) 483 (616.

5) 619 (369.0) 574 (511.5) 604 (486.5) 580 (576.0) 581 (601.8) 12x10 582 (514. 4 L (396.0) 8x10 573 (563.3) 574 (512.5) 574 SUBDIV.0) 14x17 616 (488.0) 596 (596.0) 613 (369.0) 578 (601.7) 583 (438.0) 624 (557.0) 618 (578.5) 585 (411.0) 7x5 572 (577.0) 626 (449.3) 608 (529.3) 601 (397.5 588 (546.0) 627 (592.6) 586 (514.3) 575 SUBDIV.5) 599 (617.0) 587 (613.5) 612 (578.2) 586 (510.5) SUBDIV.0) 621 (606.0) 584 (587.5) 625 (306.8) 9.3) 623 (341.5) 615 (606.4) 593 (626.0) 583 (435.5) 585 (414.4) SUBDIV.0) 605 (603.0) 17x7 629 (449.5x9.0) 607 (440.5) 575 (613.4) 597 (432. 2 L (513.5) 633 (449.5) 638 (609.5) 637 (503.0) 11x14 594 (524.4) 635 (288.8) 589 (485.0) 620 (488.0) 7x17 628 (577.0) 606 (353.5) 632 (306.3) 630 (342.2) 617 (399.0) 584 (587.0) 14x14 610 (488.5) 10x8 576 (540.0) 575 (612.5) 586 (512.0) 614 (488.0) 595 (456.5) 634 (591.5) 598 (524.0) 584 (589.0) 17x14 622 (449.5) 590 (606. 3) 11-39 APOLLO . 3 L 592 (546.0) 603 (371.5) 14x11 600 (486.0) 631 (556. 4 L (613.5) 609 (618.0) 10x12 579 (538.3) 585 (412.6) 577 (476.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Table cassette run for cassettes in inches 5x7 FULL SIZE 571 (602.3) 602 (575.5) 611 (399.4) 591 (466.0) 583 (436. 6 L 587 (611.7) (Rev.0) 636 SUBDIV.

0 mm • distance film-lower shutter = 10.. As to cross subdivisions.2 Calculation of the shutters run The calculation is based on the typical measures of the Spot Film Device reported below: • distance film-upper shutter = 17.9858 • Calculation shutters opening in Full size Format to limit in full size mode = (Film + 2) * KG where: 2 = measure in mm in addition to the format to ensure the X-rays cover the film completely • • • Calculation of the opening for Subdivision Format subdivision = ([(Film . where 180 mm is the width of the small shutter.5 mm. This allows to obtain a separation line between 2 adjacent radiograms with min SID and a thicker line with higher SIDs. In the calculation of the formats to limit. the window opening start will require a run equal to (475/2)+180=417. Therefore to obtain an opening equal to 0 mm for cross subdivisions. will be used.5 mm. calculated with min SID (1000 mm).div) * KG Dimension of the shutter run for subdivisions in line Run = (426 / 2) . when the shutters are wide open. this position is equal to a 475 mm opening. the shutters will have to move of 417. the obtained separation lines would be too thin or radiograms would overlap in case of SIDs smaller that the one used for the KG calculation. As to line subdivisions.div)] / N. calculated with SID greater than the min.4.e.(2 * N.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11.8/1000 = 0. therefore to obtain an opening equal to 0 mm the shutters will have to move of 475/2 mm.5 mm • mean distance film-shutters = 13.(Fsubdiv / 2) Dimension of the shutter run for cross subdivisions Run = 393 + (Fsubdiv / 2) (Rev. i. the values KG (radiography correction). Should a KG be used.75 mm (cell 443) • minimum source to film distance = 1000 mm • maximum source to film distance = 1500 mm. • Calculation of the constant of exposure subdivisions correction (KG) KG = distance source-shutters / source to film distance KG = 985.3. The origin position for the calculation of all runs is the one relative to the calibration of the shutters minimum potmeter. 3) 11-41 APOLLO .

4L SUBDIV. 4L SUBDIV.0) 559 (114.2) 561 (210.5) 642 (100.2) SUBDIV.0) 564 (96.0) 9. DIMENSION CASSETTE WIDTH 13 FULL SIZE 15 565 (153.0) APOLLO 11-42 (Rev.5) 644 (124. 2L SUBDIV.2) SUBDIV.0) 659 (85. 3L SUBDIV.0) 566 (118.0) 17 661 (431.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Table shutters opening for cassettes subdivisions cm.0) 551 (99.0) Table shutters opening for cassettes subdivisions inches DIMENSION CASSETTE WIDTH 5 FULL SIZE 7 660 (182.8) 562 (139.0) 657 (176.0) 10 643 (256.0) 549 (148.2) 646 (149.0) 649 (100. 6L 544 (87.8) 662 (210.8) 555 (127. 2L SUBDIV.0) 12 645 (308.5) 552 (97.4) 8 640 (205. 6L 641 (98.0) 24 546 (240.6) 664 (103. 4L SUBDIV.0) 35 557 (353.0) 43 560 (431.0) 652 (78.0) 547 (117.5) 558 (172.0) 14 656 (360.0) 30 548 (301.0) 11 653 (280.0) 663 (139.0) 639 (132.0) 542 (131.4) 648 (99.0) 550 (147.0) 18 543 (183. 3L SUBDIV.0) 651 (115.5 650 (243.5) 554 (194. 4) .0) 655 (89.3) 658 (115.5) 545 (86.1) 669 (103.0) 556 (96. 4L SUBDIV.0) 647 (149.8) 40 553 (401.5) 20 563 (200.2) 654 (136.

the smaller will be the result of the fraction.5 Safety aspects for PDI-controlled movements In case the PDI value generated by the software and sent to the motors' activations differs from the feedback speed supplied by the potmeters or by the encoders.0 Setting (Rev. the greater will be k. Being k the denominator of the fraction. the smaller is the PDI/k value the more a mechanically "rigid" movement will be accepted without issuing any alarm. which are set for each movement. the more the movement will accept "hardenings".3. For each of the PDI-controlled movements. the greater are the time values and k. and the time beyond which this variance triggers an alarm: • Variance time It is expressed in seconds and it allows to mask possible spikes of the value of the PDI value determined by friction or typical momentum of inertia at the start. the larger is this time. 2 values determine the variance amount between PDI and speed.0 Setting Scan movement Cell 673 674 Function PID subdivision factor Diagnosis delay sec Unit Default 8000 1. allowing a non-controlled wide movement before issuing an alarm. The software compares the value of the speed with the PDI/k value. As the alarm is issued if PDI/k > speed. the system must be able to recognise this effect and therefore bring the equipment to a halt. the longer will be the movement before an alarm is issued. • K factor This factor divides the PDI (PDI/k) value. 3) 11-43 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11. By and large. Angulation movement Cell 671 672 Function PID subdivision factor Diagnosis delay sec Unit Default 8000 1. This inconvenient may be caused by a mechanical hardening or by a gear slippage at the potmeter. In case a real problem occurs.

0 Setting Shutters movement Cell 679 680 Function PID subdivision factor Diagnosis delay sec Unit Default 10000 1.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Tilting-lifting movement Cell 675 676 Function PID subdivision factor Diagnosis delay sec Unit Default 8000 1.0 Setting APOLLO 11-44 (Rev. 3) .0 Setting Cross subdivision movement Cell 685 686 Function PID subdivision factor Diagnosis delay sec Unit Default 10000 1.0 Setting Cassette feeding movement Cell 681 682 Function PID subdivision factor Diagnosis delay sec Unit Default 10000 1.

3. Power off the equipment and position dip switches 1 and 3 on ON. This component stores all data necessary to the functioning of the equipment. then F3 Carry out the same operations as for the EEprom – RAM copy. (Rev.4 Position 701 – EEprom copy This program permits to make a copy from EEprom. you need to copy these data on a spare backup EEprom. power off the equipment. The following message is displayed: 702 RAM – EEPROM copy Press correction. then F3. At every start these data are loaded in the RAM. please follow the procedure below: 1. The following will be displayed: 701 EEPROM – RAM copy Press correction. The equipment can now be used with a spare EEprom that contains all functional data. The data will be stored on the new EEprom. carry out the procedure of access to the various groups as described above. Power on the equipment. The data copy from EEprom to RAM will start. If for safety reasons. 2. then F3 To access the EEprom copy program. press button MODE2 as displayed. At this point. The following message is displayed: 701 EEPROM – RAM copy Transferring data After a few seconds. 3) 11-45 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11. Power the table back on. When the access to the copy program is enabled following the correct procedures. 5. Turn off 4. the following message is displayed: 701 EEPROM – RAM copy Transfer completed. if the process has been completed successfully and no alarms are issued. replace the EEprom with an identical component on which you might want to store all functional data of the equipment.

5 Position 711 – Clock settings and reset alarm memory Cells from 711 to 719 are used to set the date and time stored in the RAM. 3) . Once access to edit position 711 has been achieved (see chapter 11) the display shows: 711 22 .0 Position 718 permits to adjust the clock in case it runs too fast or too slow due to Quarz variations.2004 07 : 02 : 44 Scrolling the pages by keys "MODE3" and "TEST" the positions will be displayed: 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 Year setting Month setting Day setting Hour setting Minutes setting Seconds setting Clock adjustment 04 10 22 07 02 44 +0. For a correct interpretation of the alarms memory. Date and time are used as they will be associated to the alarms that might be issued. the alarm memory stored in the Flash eprom will be reset.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11. it is also possible to reset the "alarms log" in the Flash Eprom. APOLLO 11-46 (Rev. The last position of this group is the following: 719 F3 = reset Reset alarm memory By pressing function key F3. This resetting operation can be useful after the equipment maintenance.10 . it is imperative that date and time are correct. Besides.

the following message will be displayed: 721 SPOT FILM DEVICE test 1 TABLE test 2 By keying in the access code relative to this position. 3) 11-47 APOLLO . it will be possible to select the type of test to be performed by typing 1 for the Spot Film Device test or 2 for the table test. (Rev. After performing the access procedure.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11. These tests are useful when checking the movements for correct functioning under stress conditions.6 Position 721 – Test Spot Film Device and table life The Apollo table is set to perform cyclic movement tests. It is possible to perform tests for the Spot Film Device or table movements.

I. (cell 217) Full size 43 Max I. the cyclic test begins and the following message is displayed: 722 Test Spot Film Device life Num.cycles: 00000000 Num. Program 40/4 in line is carried out with cassette 30 as the program 4 in line for cassette 30 is not available. (cell 214) 30/3 field I.: 00000000 A test cycle is structured in a way that the following positionings are carried out: Cassette position Park Program: 30 Full size Park Program: 30/2 Park Program: 30 Full size Park Program: 30/3 Park Program: 30 Full size Park Program: 40/4 (line) Park Program: 30 Full size Park Program: 30/4 (cross) 4th Shutters and collimator position 4th field I. Every time the cassette is put in the parking position.I.I.I.I. (cell 215) Full size 43 Min I. (cell 217) Full size 43 Max I. the shutters position themselves on size 43 rather than on size 30 to carry out the maximum possible run. APOLLO 11-48 (Rev.1 Spot Film Device test The Spot Film Device perform the initialisation procedure after which the following message is displayed: Load cassette 30x24 By loading the cassette correctly.exp.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11.I.I. the following outputs are enabled: • fluoro request • CCD output in rotation • I. (cell 216) 30/2 Medium I. (cell 215) Full size 43 Min I. (cell 216) 40/4 (line) Medium I.6. field output in rotation. 3) .I.I. (cell 214) 30/4 (cross) In the Full size modality.

On the display the number of exposures increases each time the cassette position itself in the X-ray field. At the end of a complete cycle (as described in the table). A complete cycle consists of 17 cassette positions. The number of exposures can be modified by pressing button MODE2 to enable the correction and by keying in the desired number by means of the numeric keypad.. make sure that the accessories linked to the Apollo table are not power-supplied. before resuming with what described up until now. before starting the Spot Film Device test. exposure outputs are enabled • the grid oscillates for 1 sec. so is the number of cycles every time a complete cycle is performed. 3) 11-49 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) Every time the cassette is directed towards the exposure position: • the prep. WARNING: As outputs for the system accessories get enabled. the following occurs: • the grid movement as far as the parking position and return to field • • • all outputs are turned on all console LEDs flash up the collimator lamp lights up for 5 secs. II step. digital prep. At the end of each program the cassette is ejected. the cassette guides are open and closed again until they grip the cassette. (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11.I. WARNING: As the movements are activated automatically without opening the SF circuit. Nonetheless pay always attention during automatic movements performed by this program. during this test.2 Table test The table will cyclically perform movements that allow to check the correct functioning of the various organs. Particularly during the first cycle. Therefore its K3 ready relay does not close. The following message is displayed: 723 Table life test Number cycles: 00000000 Before starting the proper test cycle. 3) . make a jumper on the connector X47 between pins 6 and 7. In order to perform the test. WARNING: The test is conceived in such a way to limit the movements in case collisions occur. Remove the jumper at the end of the test.. the cycle is interrupted and the following message is displayed: Cycle interrupted due to collision The equipment needs to be powered off. the life test interrupted and the table positioned in a way such that no condition of collision occurs when the default position is in the process of being reached. the supervisor is disabled. APOLLO 11-50 (Rev.6. the table goes into the default position with the following settings: • Minimum SID • Tabletop in the middle • 0° angulation • scan in the middle • Compressor in parking position • 0° tilting • Minimum lift depending on the installed I. Should in this phase a collision condition occur. stay close to the emergency red button and be ready to activate it if any risk condition occurs.

the movements invert their direction until they reach the scan feet side and external table end of run. movement inversion till reaching the vertical end of run. Return of both movements to the centre • tilting towards Trendelembourg. the test will stop the movement in proximity of the collision limit. The number of exposures can be modified by pressing button MODE2 to enable the correction and by keying in the desired number by means of the numeric keypad. In case the room where the table is installed is of dimensions such that the complete excursion of some movement is not possible. the number of cycles increases by one unit and the cycle picks up again with the SID and compressor movement.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) A test cycle is structured in a way that the following positionings are carried out: • SID ascent with concurrent compressor descent. (Rev. When the limit is reached. inversion until feet end of run and return to 0° • scan movement towards head concurrent with table inward movement. the movements invert the direction until they bring themselves back with minimum SID and compressor in the parking position • angulation towards the head. 3) 11-51 APOLLO . then return to 0°. When the limit is reached. At the end of the tilting movement.

7 Position 731 – Remote service function Apollo table was designed to be able to transmit data stored in EEprom and in Flash Eprom to a PC that can be directly connected to the CPU. This function is still working in the background and not yet available. APOLLO 11-52 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11. 3) .

from the following ones. Messages 100 is deleted when a new messages is stored. they take up 5 displays (pages) each.e. 3) 11-53 APOLLO . The last 20 messages. those marked by positions from 1 to 20 are in the long format.8 Position 751 – Alarms memory The recorded alarm storage function permits to recreate the equipment history allowing the identification of anomalies or failures.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) 11. The Flash Eprom memory can store 100 messages that are stored in progressive order with the LIFO system (last in. 4 etc. stores them permanently. first out). (Rev. This archive is structured in such a way that the occurred diagnosis are temporarily stored in the RAM. 3 . The messages with number 1 will therefore be the most recent to be moved to position 2. i. in turn. every 10 minutes the RAM "uploads" these data in the Flash Eprom which.

3) .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 11-54 (Rev.

3) 11-55 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) PAGE 751: Display alarms data and table positions Note: If ERR is displayed in one of the fields relative to a potmeter. it means that the potmeter was out of range Line 1 a b c d e f Line 2 g h i l m a 0 p 0 E 1 N ± 1 X diagnosis position in the memory (from 1 to 20) diagnosis code diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy) diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm) tilting angle in degrees scan position with respect to the centre in mm (negative head side) column angle in degrees source to film distance in mm tabletop position with respect to the centre in mm (inside negative side) main beam movement extension tube in mm middle beam movement extension tube in mm b 2 X c 5 D 2 F 2 F d 1 X e 1 X f ± X X X X X X 1 X X 0 2 B A 2 r 3 ± : X 5 X r t i r B A C C A u r l ± X X X X X X g h i l m (Rev. when the error occurs.

3) .div trolley position from centre in mm film level limitation dimension for width collimator in cm film level limitation dimension for width collimator height in cm film level limitation dimension for iris collimator in cm cassette size (width x height) selected cassette subdivision program number of subdivisions still available compressor in field = 1 in park = 0 I.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) PAGE 752: Display Spot Film Device organs and selections Note: If ERR is displayed in one of the fields relative to a potmeter.I. when the error occurs. lift position high = 1 low = 0 selected modality 0 = direct 1 = spot film device 2 = digital 3 = tomo spot film device 4 = tomo digital 5 = angio o G A s A X p X X X X X q X X X X X r ± X X s X X X N X G D r i i v C E s r p o X C m X B A i C F A u l N X X X C x C o B z t u v z w x y APOLLO 11-56 (Rev. it means that the potmeter was out of range Line 1 n o p q r s Line 2 t u v z w x y n l C i i m r ± X X X X X shutters opening dimension in mm gripping opening in mm distance grid from minimum SW (parking side) in mm cross.

value 1 means that that control was active at the moment when the diagnosis occurred Line 1 Position j0 j1 j2 j3 j4 Line 2 Position j5 j6 j7 j8 j9 j0 C D o F l F l X Joystick function Collimator Angulation Scan – tabletop Lift Tilt. 3) 11-57 APOLLO .tbltop fluoro request prep request X-rays request d X a up up on/off on/off on/off b X X b down down c 0 machine d centr. compr-0-cent.tabletop a X X b X c X j1 p m z E C N X a X X c X X d X j2 C s C A o B X a A X b X c X d X X j3 A r s C x X a X b X j4 r i B F a X b X c X d X C o p r E j5 a b j6 a b c d j7 a j8 a j9 a (Rev..function a height open centering out up vertical b height close head side in Down Trendelem. c width open feet side head side centering d width close reset feet side function Joystick function source-to-film dist.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) PAGE 753: Display joystick Note: The value 0 means that the joystick is idle.

I. Button double control tabletop center. lift end of run high I. tilt. Button double control lift up Button double control lift down Button double control scan head side Button double control scan feet side Dip switch modality 3 selection Dip switch modality 4 selection I. Line 1: Groups A – B – C – D – E Line 2: Groups F – G – H – I 0 1 2 11 18 33 34 36 40 41 52 53 54 60 61 A D G A Tube at 0° End of run compressor high End of run compressor low Movement active compressor Single Fault series input Photosensor access cassette Cassette size photosensor Gripping pressure switch Button double control vertical tilt. Button double control SID up Button double control SID down Dip switch modality 1 selection Dip switch modality 2 selection B E H 19 20 21 22 23 42 43 44 45 46 62 63 3 4 35 Generator ready X-ray ON Digital workspace Spot film device workspace Shelf safety Button double control centering tilt. Button double control Trendel. 3) . As to inputs from external accessories. 0 means disabled input. 1 enabled input.I.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) PAGE 754: Display digital inputs NOTE: The display of the inputs referred to the switches is =1 when the switch is in the NC position and therefore the input is at 0 V. lift end of run low Trapping access C F i 27 28 29 30 31 47 48 49 50 51 55 Auxiliary fluoro control Auxiliary preparation control R control (II step auxiliary) main beam/angulation inverter started middle beam/scan inverter started Button double control angulation head side Button double control angulation feet side Button double control centering angulation Button double control tabletop inside Button double control tabletop outside Button 0 machine 0 1 2 11 18 B 19 20 21 22 23 G 52 53 54 60 61 C 27 28 29 30 31 H 62 63 D 33 34 36 40 41 i E 42 43 44 45 46 F 47 48 49 50 51 3 4 35 55 APOLLO 11-58 (Rev.

lift motor high Request I.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) PAGE 755: Display digital outputs NOTE: Motors enabling: R cassette. For all other outputs 0 means disabled output. L cassette. motor request Request gripping opening motor Request gripping closing motor N R U 20 21 23 24 25 40 41 42 43 44 64 65 66 67 68 Compressor motor up request Compressor motor down request Width collimator motor open request Width collimator motor close request Width collimator motor fast request fluoro request X-rays request Preparation request Request digital preparation Request II step Direction R feeding motor Direction L feeding motor Direction shutter motor Direction cross subdivision motor Enable R feeding motor 0 1 10 11 12 m 13 14 15 18 19 s N 20 21 23 24 25 t p 26 27 28 29 30 u 64 65 66 67 68 Q 31 32 33 34 35 v 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 60 61 62 63 69 70 71 16 17 (Rev. 1 enabled output.I. shutters and cross subdivision are =1 when the motor is idle and =0 when is running. Line 1: Groups L – M – N – P – Q Line 2: Groups R – S – T – U – V L P S V l r 0 1 10 11 12 26 27 28 29 30 45 46 47 48 49 69 70 71 16 17 Angulation/scan request Main beam/middle beam inverter request SID relay up SID relay down Main beam brake release Height collimator motor open request Height collimator motor close request Height collimator motor fast request Iris collimator motor open request Iris collimator motor request close Tomography speed I Tomography speed II 7° tomography angle 20° tomography angle 30° tomography angle Enable L feeding motor Enable shutters motor Enable cross subdivision motor Request I. 3) 11-59 APOLLO . lift motor low M Q T 13 14 15 18 19 31 32 33 34 35 50 60 61 62 63 Middle beam brake release Angulation brake release Scan brake release Tabletop motor in request Tabletop motor out request Iris collimator motor fast request Main beam/angulation invert enable forward Main beam/angulation invert enable backward Enabling middle beam/scan inverter forward Enabling middle beam/scan inverter backwards 45° tomography angle Grid in field motor request Grid in parking pos.I.

as a result of the most recent ones being introduced . Because the view (page) consists of 2 lines. only 2 diagnosis at a time will be displayed.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) When the diagnosis is moved . the view is reduced and occupies one single line.to a memory position between 21 and 100. The reduced diagnosis are displayed as follows: PAGE 800: Display reduced diagnosis Line 1 a b c d Line 2 e f g h a 0 0 2 2 1 2 1 0 diagnosis position in the memory (from 21 to 100 odd numbers) diagnosis code diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy) diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm) diagnosis position in the memory (from 22 to 100 even numbers) diagnosis code diagnosis memorisation date (dd-mm-yy) diagnosis memorisation hour (hh-mm) b 2 9 5 6 2 2 2 5 c 1 1 1 1 d 0 0 2 2 2 1 3 0 : : 1 0 5 7 e f g h APOLLO 11-60 (Rev. 3) .

(Rev. data are stored temporarily in the RAM and every 10 minutes are permanently stored in the Flash Eprom. and permits to evaluate whether preventative maintenance is necessary. This holds for the Spot Film Device. The activation of all other movements is displayed as time in minutes and seconds. the 2-digit decimal fraction indicates the seconds. digital and direct modality. lift. Following is a representation of the view relative to this group. use button MODE3 to scroll down and button TEST to scroll up. The 7-digit number of cycles of the I.9 Position 850 – Table cycles memory The Apollo table stores the activation times of the various movements besides the number of exposures and. ascends or descends. The cycles and times view is shown on 3 pages. 15 reset pages for each data are available. This memorisation permits to check the wear and tear of the various organs with respect to the working time. 3) 11-61 APOLLO . To scroll the views. When technical maintenance entailing the replacement of organs takes place.SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (excluding group 100) 11. The common fraction of the 4-digit view indicates the minutes. Following the 3 cycles and times views. each movement activation time can be reset independently of the other movements. the number of movements of the I.I.I.I. The 8-digit exposure number increases each time an exposure is carried out. lift increases each time the I. In the same way as for the alarm memorisation. if present.

SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 11-62 (Rev. 3) .

p 0 r 0 .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) PAGE 850: Display activation cycles (first page) a b c number of exposures (all modalities SFD–DIG–DIR) fluoroscopy activation time number of movements I. 3) 11-63 APOLLO . r 0 o 0 0 0 p 0 E g 0 N . . (Rev. 0 0 F 0 l 0 u b 0 o . D 0 . r 0 o 0 0 A 0 s 0 C c 0 . v 0 E 0 PAGE 851: Display activation cycles (second page) f g h activation time scan motor movement activation time angulation motor movement activation time SID motor movement i l activation time transversal tabletop motor movement activation time compressor motor movement f 0 0 C 0 A 0 r . F 0 0 0 0 B 0 A i 0 r . 0 i 0 B 0 0 0 C 0 u d 0 l . 0 0 0 0 C 0 o l 0 m .I. lift d e activation time middle beam motor movement activation time main beam motor movement a 0 0 E 0 x 0 p 0 o 0 s 0 . l 0 A 0 0 0 t 0 r e 0 A . 0 0 0 0 D h 0 F .

G 0 l 0 . time motors R and L belts cassette movement activation time grid motor movement p q activation time cross subdivision motor movement activation time cassette close motor movement m 0 0 l 0 i 0 m . C 0 E 0 0 G 0 A 0 N q 0 A . s 0 C 0 . 3) . APOLLO 11-64 (Rev. 0 0 C 0 r p 0 o .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) PAGE 852: Display activation cycles (third page) m n o activation time shutters motor movement activ. i 0 t 0 . 0 0 0 G 0 r o 0 i . s 0 . 0 0 C 0 A n 0 s .

the data will be reset. 3) 11-65 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (except group 100) From this point the 15 reset pages are displayed as follows: 00000000 F3 = reset Resetting xxxxxx xxxxxxxx where: 00000000 Resetting = number of cycles or memorised time = description of function to be reset. By pressing key F3. (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Access and data function of all groups (excluding group 100) THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 11-66 (Rev. 3) .

The first µS is connected on the open contact (NA) and will be responsible for the movement request. thanks to the feedback of the potmeters of each "movement group". The series connection permits to have a single wire that is sent to an input that reaches both the main processor and the supervisor. The movements of: • tilting – lift • angulation • scan • transversal tabletop movement • source to film distance (SID) • compressor which are present on the remote-controlled table comply with the abovedescribed SF safety measures. The second is connected to a closed contact (NC) and is connected in series with all second µS that feature the SF safety function. those functions that may be dangerous to the patient if they are not under control. if a single fault at a time occurs (hence the term Single Fault). to the various levels of the chain the movement consists of. i. Moreover. (Rev. Both conditions must be fulfilled in order to guarantee the activation of the movement (SF circuit open. This safety measure is devised in such as way that. the system can identify the fault and take the appropriate action that brings the movement to an immediate halt. together with the fluoro and X-ray preparation movements. 3) 12-1 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Single Fault operating logic 12 SINGLE FAULT OPERATING LOGIC The scope of the Single Fault is a redundant check on the activation circuits of the table movements. a second processor called supervisor is connected via serial and parallel port (on the above-listed movements outputs) to the main processor. To complete the redundant checks on all levels. All controls relative to the above-listed movements. The control logic bases the SF check on the correspondence of the SF circuit and of the movements request.e. can be realised with a double microswitch (µS). the main processor is able to recognise if a movement is active without an active request. movements request circuit close). which are present on the pedal or on the button. which are present on both on the console and on the double control.

3) . each organ responsible for the movement is monitored and if a failure on the movement activation circuit occurs. APOLLO 12-2 (Rev. one or both processors stop exciting the relative relay and interrupt immediately any movement. 2 relays called ready relays (K2 and K3) are controlled each by a processor and the contact are connected in series. If any anomaly is detected. Thanks to such HW and SW logic.SERVICE MANUAL Single Fault operating logic This permits to check a possible malfunctioning of the main processor that will have to manage in a consistent way the serial and parallel data to the output ports. The series of contacts interrupts the supply of the magnetic switch that supplies the power circuits. the system can detect and interrupt the movement itself generating an alarm.

movements commands that can bring the element into collision are suddenly inhibited. The message LIMIT REACHED is displayed until the activation of a command that informs the operator that some movements might be disabled. the piloting algorithm of the main beam and middle beam motors is adjusted by activating an anti-collision function. all those movements that apparently may not be dangerous but.). the ceiling and the floor. the movement that determined this situation is stopped. On the other hand. Following are 4 tables with the representations of the various conditions. the intensifier or the compressor reach such limit. the extremities of the main beam (corresponding to the extremities of the tabletop).SERVICE MANUAL Functionality 13 13. one part of the equipment might reach the safety limit beyond which a collision with the walls. the compressor and the tube-collimator group. (Rev. When a part of the equipment reaches this limit. set by means of group 200 cells. The parts of the table that can collide with walls. depending on where the movement comes from and is directed to (example from –90° towards 0° or from 0° towards +90° etc. Each representation is a "LIMIT REACHED" condition for the tubecollimator group with the right wall. 3) 13-1 APOLLO . could increase the risk of collision are inhibited. Should this limit be reached because of the tilting movement instead. As for the tube-collimator group.1 FUNCTIONALITY Collision When activating one or more movements. the left wall. represents an imaginary insuperable software barrier beyond which it is impossible to move for any part of the equipment. the ceiling or the floor might occur. if they continued. This will allow the intensifier to move out of the limit area without stopping the movement and with no need for the operator to adjust the patient centering position. because of the particular Apollo table lift-tilting function. the message SCAN LIMIT is displayed. floor or ceiling are: the image intensifier. When the intensifier reaches the limit towards the floor because of the scan movement. When the extremities of the main beam. This limit. movements commands that can bring the components away from the collision point are free.

"0" referred to the angulation indicates that the column is perpendicular to the table.SERVICE MANUAL Functionality In the first pair of columns are indicated the angles in which the table (RIB) or the column (ANG) could find themselves when the limit is reached. 3) . The 5 following couples of columns report the movements and relative directions responsible for the direct or indirect movement of the tubecollimator group. Table showing movements allowed for Tube – Right Wall collision ANGLES TILT ANG SCAN HEAD YES ANGULATION HEAD YES TILTING TREND YES LIFT UP NO SID UP NO FEET NO FEET NO VERT NO DOWN NO DOWN YES 0 0 0 0 + 0 0 + + + - YES NO YES NO YES NO NO YES NO YES + + - YES YES YES NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO YES YES YES APOLLO 13-2 (Rev. The YES cells indicate that the movement is free. while the NO cells indicated that the movement is inhibited. "+" indicates that the column is inclined towards the feet and "-" that it is inclined towards the head. "0" referred to the tilting means that the table is in the horizontal position. "+" indicates that the table is inclined towards the vertical position and "-" that the table is inclined towards the Trendelemburg. The grey cells indicate that the potential collision will never occur for that particular combination of tilting angle and angulation angle.

SERVICE MANUAL Functionality Table showing movements allowed for Tube – Left Wall collision ANGLES TILT ANG SCAN HEAD FEET ANGULATION HEAD FEET TILTING TREND VERT UP LIFT DOWN UP SID DOWN 0 0 0 0 + 0 0 NO YES NO YES NO YES NO NO NO YES + + + - NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES + + - NO NO NO YES YES YES NO NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO YES YES YES Table showing movements allowed for Tube – Ceiling collision ANGLES TILT ANG SCAN HEAD NO NO NO NO YES NO NO YES YES ANGULATION HEAD NO NO YES NO YES NO NO NO YES TILTING TREND NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO LIFT UP NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO SID UP NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO FEET NO NO NO YES NO YES YES NO NO FEET NO YES NO YES NO YES NO NO NO VERT NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DOWN YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO DOWN YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 0 0 0 0 + 0 0 + + + - + + - (Rev. 3) 13-3 APOLLO .

3) .SERVICE MANUAL Functionality Table showing movements allowed for Tube – Floor collision ANGLES TILT ANG SCAN HEAD FEET ANGULATION HEAD FEET TILTING TREND VERT UP LIFT DOWN UP SID DOWN 0 0 0 0 + 0 0 YES NO YES YES NO NO NO YES NO NO YES YES YES NO YES YES NO NO NO YES NO NO YES YES YES NO YES YES NO NO NO YES NO NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES YES YES YES YES + + + - + + - APOLLO 13-4 (Rev.

the movement in progress is stopped and a message is displayed: << LIMIT BARRIER >> with an intermittent buzzer sound. when the safety barrier is infringed the input must open Once the anticollision sensor is activated. it will be possible to activate only the movement that had generated the "limit barrier" alarm in the opposite direction.1 Anticollision barrier When the room where the device is installed has irregularities in its geometry that make necessary supplemental anticollision measures. If the limit barrier is activated in the following conditions: • switch on of the system • access to tomography functionality • access to angiographic functionality • during execution of a Tomography test • during execution of a step angiography test • movement to reach a stored position by means of command "0". the Apollo table can be protected against the risk of collision with these geometrical irregularities of the room.SERVICE MANUAL Functionality 13.1. the movement is stopped and the active functionality. Depending from the specific needs it is possible to implement light barrier sensors or antenna switches that when activated prevent table components from hitting obstacles of the room. Before giving any movement command it is necessary to check carefully which movement will bring the table far away from the obstacle. ALL movement commands by joystick or on board keyboard are enabled. positioned in the lower end of the display. if any. Connection of these safety devices must be done so that it sends 0V to input X0-17 when operating conditions are correct. making possible to start any movement. (Rev. then to exit from this "limit barrier" lock it is necessary to proceed with a "bypass" procedure as outlined here below. 3) 13-5 APOLLO . In this condition no joystick or button of the on board keyboard is active. All other commands (joystick on console and keys on the on-board keypad) are disabled until the message "limit barrier" is removed. Keeping pressed at the same time keys F4 and F5. is reset. WARNING: This "bypass" procedure can be very dangerous since a wrong command can cause any part of the table to hit the obstacle in the room. To exit this condition and restore normal operation of the system. This "bypass" procedure is always possible when the "limit barrier" condition has been reached. In any case always activate the movement with great care in short pulses.

1.2 Anti entrapment device The Apollo table can be equipped with an anti-entrapment feature (standard on C-CSA-US versions) which blocks the angulation movement an the inner table top side movement should the patient come in contact with the areas in which the anti-entrapment sensors are located. The circuit is realised in such a way if the safety membranes are pressed the movement is blocked as described above. 3) .SERVICE MANUAL Functionality 13. and if the circuit is broken alarm 82 is generated. In this case the angulation and/or inner table top side movements are automatically blocked and it is possible to activate the unit only in the opposite direction of that which caused the entrapment. APOLLO 13-6 (Rev.

the ascent is enabled again for a time depending on the current compression force without taking into account the previous partial ascent. The compressor ascent movement is as all Apollo table movements of the "dead man" type.e.0 lbs). the compressor is taken back to the parking position. if during the compressor ascent the joystick is released. NOTE: Every time the compressor activates the parking switch. such as by breathing.2 Compressor When the compressor is not in the parking position (i. 3) 13-7 APOLLO . It will then be possible to move the patient and the tube without risk and. The compressor releases the compression by enabling the cone ascent for 240 msecs if the potmeter exceeds the set dead band.SERVICE MANUAL Functionality 13. therefore. when the high end of run microswitch is released). compress the patient once again. Release and push again the movement joystick to activate the desired movement. By pushing the joystick once again. When the time limit is almost reached.5 sec after complete release of the compression force. afterwards. the movement will stop. G (Rev. Only after completion of the ascent. When the compressor is in a position different from the idle one. by activating the angulation movement. the set value of the compressor force is forced to 5 kg (11. This happens typically when the patient makes a strong pressure on the cone. the tabletop and scan movements will be free. the following will occur: • the requested movement is not activated • the compressor goes up for 0. by enabling the tabletop movement or the scan movement. the ascent stops and a confirmation acoustic signal is issued.

The software pilots the iris axis if the presence of the collimator with iris is confirmed through the selection of cell 253. – When selecting a program whose format is smaller than the format of the selected I. • Manual modality – If no program is selected. This condition is valid regardless whether the fluoro control is activated or not. The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the collimator width axis if a further reduction is performed.. The automatic mode can in turn be associated to the Hold function.I. when the fluoro control is not active. by means of the joystick. any format comprised between the minimum and the subdivision format.SERVICE MANUAL Functionality 13.3 Collimator The Apollo table is designed to accept a square field collimator or a square field one with iris. The collimator operating modes are: • automatic • manual. except for if a cross subdivision has been performed APOLLO 13-8 (Rev..I. 3) . the Hold function can be activated or excluded by the operator. It will be possible then to collimate. Conversely. which is the largest possible format. The selection of the collimator operating mode depends both on the choice of the operator and on the condition of the "Digital (X0-14)" and " Spot Film Device (X0-15)" inputs. when the fluoro control is activated. by means of the joystick it is possible to collimate a format comprised between the minimum and maximum size. the maximum format available is equal to the selected I. The conditions are: Inputs X0-14 ON (Digital) X0-15 ON (Spot Film Device) X0-14 OFF X0-15 OFF (Direct) Manual modality NOT POSSIBLE SELECTABLE ACTIVE Automatic modality ACTIVE SELECTABLE NOT POSSIBLE When the automatic function is active or selected. the collimator positions itself on the division format. The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the width axis of the collimator during this limitation.

I. it will be possible to position the axes on formats comprised between the minimum and the selected I. In case an iris collimator is present. format and the minimum one.I. • Automatic modality – If no program is selected. except the case in which a cross subdivision has been performed – When selecting a program whose format is greater in comparison with the one of the selected I. by means of the joystick.SERVICE MANUAL Functionality – – – – – – When selecting a program whose format is greater in comparison with the one of the selected I. any format comprised between the minimum and the subdivision format. when the fluoro control is activated. it will be possible to position the axes on formats comprised between the minimum and the selected format. field. which is the largest possible format. by means of the joystick. when the fluoro control is not active. The manual function LED on the console is always on regardless whether the fluoro control is on or off.I. format. In case the collimation is greater in comparison with the selected I. the collimator always positions itself on the selected subdivision format – At any time the manual collimator function may be selected. the automatic collimator function may be selected. At any time.I. the iris limitation control buttons are not active and the iris will always be circumscribed at the width and height axes.I.I. by means of the joystick. field.I. 3) 13-9 APOLLO .. It will be possible then to collimate. the shutters go back to the position in they had before the activation of the fluoro control. Both axes will bring themselves on the selected I.I. the collimator positions itself on the division format. When the fluoro control is released. The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the width axis of the collimator during this limitation. it is possible to collimate a format comprised between the set I. (Rev. by means of the joystick. – If an iris collimator is present. field. format position If the equipment is powered off when the collimator is in the manual mode. when powering back on. Conversely. it is possible to collimate in a circular way by means of the iris control buttons. by pressing the fluoro control. – When the preparation control is activated.I. the automatic function will be activated.. The shutters inside the Spot Film Device follow the collimator width axis if a further reduction is performed.. – When selecting a program whose format is smaller than the format of the selected I. the maximum possible format is the one of the selected I. In this case the axes and height will be circumscribed to the iris. the collimation will be reduced to the I.

by pressing the lamp collimator button when the light is on the light goes off. with or without iris are fitted with a halogen lamp for the patient centering without fluoro. This work cycle ensures that the parts that might get into contact with the patient do not reach high temperatures due to overheating of the halogen lamp. The same holds for the limitations performed by means of the iris. WARNING: The switching on and off cycle of the collimator lamp should not exceed 2 consecutive duty cycles followed by 180 secs. In this case when preparation is activated the collimator stays in the position obtained by means of the joystick. from the switching on.SERVICE MANUAL Functionality • Hold automatic modality The functioning is identical to the automatic modality except for the case in which during the fluoro a reduction by means of the joystick of one of both axes is performed. of switching off. Both collimators. APOLLO 13-10 (Rev. By pressing the lamp collimator button when the light is off the light goes on. The light goes off anyhow after 45 secs. 3) .

by performing technical maintenance with access to group 100. such memorised values will be lost. the joystick and the 0 key on the console and on the keypad on board of the table permit to reach stored positions.SERVICE MANUAL Functionality 13. When the relative LED lights up. After setting the above-mentioned values. therefore the table positioning is not allowed when the angio step and tomo modalities are active. The default positions are as follows: • tilting at 0° with lift at minimum depending on the installed I. The same will happen if the EEPROM is replaced. press the MODE button which the desired setting is associated to. When one or more stored values are present.I. At the end of the 5 secs. The completion of such procedure is confirmed with the following message POSITIONS REACHED on the display. the following message is displayed: POSITIONS STORED To recall a condition. the last selection (LED associated to the MODE button on) is maintained both during the operating mode and at the start. (Rev. hold the joystick or key 0 pressed until the setting is completed. To modify these stored values.4 Table automatic positioning The Apollo table is designed in such a way to allow to store 3 operating conditions. MODE2 and MODE3 permit to store and retrieve these conditions. Note that if the operator has stored positions different from the default ones. • scan in the middle • column at 0° • SID on minimum • Tabletop in the centre • Compressor in parking position • Slow tilting speed • tabletop and scan movements orientation according to monitor. Buttons MODE1. The joystick and button 0 are not active. the 3 LEDs relative to the MODE buttons are off. the MODE button you want to associate with the actual configuration. press for 5 secs. When all 3 memories are default ones. 3) 13-11 APOLLO . bring the above-listed movements in the desired positions and choose the 3 selections (tilting speed and movement orientation) depending on the need. The 3 conditions are stored in the EEPROM and contain default values when the equipment is shipped from the factory and every time that the potmeters adjustment subroutine (group 100) is accessed.

3) .SERVICE MANUAL Functionality THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 13-12 (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14 14. The Spot Film Device performs all the cassette-carrying scan. The size of the cassette in the Spot Film Device and the number of possible exposures are shown on the display once the subdivision program has been selected. by performing sequential exposures. 3) 14-1 APOLLO . automatic+hold. These also follow possible reductions carried out by the width axle of the collimator. It is possible to carry out radiography investigations with return of the cassette to the park at the end of every exposure to allow a fluoro investigation or in rapid mode. (Rev. vibration grid and shutter movements. It is possible to carry out investigations in fluoro and in exposure by operating the pedal commands (standard) or button controls (optional).1 OPERATING MODE Spot Film Device Input X0-15 is active. or manual mode. The collimator can be selected in automatic.

SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 1. or div. exposure of: .36 secs. collimator ↓ I step: • Movement towards posit.Collimator within 5 secs.I.Shutters . → ← Reset joystick activation ↑ NO → Alarm 060 → ↑ NO → Alarm 062 → ↑ ↑ NO → YES → YES → Alarm 064 I step: Alarm 067 II step: Alarm 066 Alarm 065 → ↑ → ↑ → NO ↓ YES • I and II step release with X-ray end time. ← ("X-ray presence" OFF) NO ↓ ← APOLLO 14-2 (Rev.1. YES ↓ Exposure in progress.Cassette . Ready" within 3 secs.1 "Standard radiography" performance block diagram • Park cassette • I. 3) . YES ↓ II step at the generator • Input "generat. request" out ON ↓ • Reaching final position of: .5 secs. YES ↓ • Grid movement start • Cell 223 time decrease ↓ • Cell 223 timeout : "X-ray request" out ON ↓ • "X-ray presence" input ON within 0.Shutters .I.Cassette . shutters • I.Collimator •"Prep. • Pedal release with "X-ray presence" input ON NO ↓ • "X-ray presence" input ON after 6. or div.

esp) (Rev."X-ray request" out OFF YES ↓ Program end NO ↓ • Pedal release with program not end ← ↑ Reset joystick activation alarms ↑ • Progr. aborted • Tray expelled NO → Alarm 061 ↑ → NO → Alarm 062 → ↑ NO → Alarm 064 → ↑ → NO → YES → YES → Alarm 065 → ↑ → ↑ → Alarm 063 → ↑ ↓ ↑ NO ↓ • Next Tray • Out "X-ray request" ON ↓ YES • "X-ray presence" input ON within 3 secs.Shutters .Cassette .I. or div. Ready" within 3 secs. or div. YES ↓ • "X-ray request" out ON ↓ • "X-ray presence" input ON within 0.SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14.5 sec .Collimator • "Prep. request" out ON • Grid movem.36 secs.2 "Rapid sequence" block diagram • Subdivision and shutter select. start ↓ • Reaching final position of: .Collimator within 5 secs.Cassette . 3) 14-3 APOLLO . YES ↓ • "X-ray presence" input (End X-ray) OFF within: 6. collimator ↓ I step: • Movement towards posit. ← NO → Alarm 064 → Tray OUT or park (sel.Shutters . shutters • I.I. • Park cassette • I. exposure of: .1. YES ↓ II step at the generator • Input "generat.

30. the automatic layer increase is always active. This function automatically increases the level of the layer depending on the angle set while respecting the "thickness of the cut" as shown below: • 7° increase 30 mm (1.2 Standard tomographic The tomographic mode presents various options: 4 different tomography angles (7. At the end of the ray angle.1") • 20° increase 20 mm (0.8") • 30° increase 10 mm (0.4") • 45° increase 5 mm (0. APOLLO 14-4 (Rev. The direction of the tomographic movement can be from left to right or viceversa and the automatic layer increase function can be selected. the operating mode provides for the immediate departure of the column for the next tomography. In this mode all the possible options for standard tomography. 45) each of which can be associated with 2 speeds. The exposures will therefore be alternatively from left to right and vice versa. 4) .SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14. The layer can be set with steps of 1 mm from a value 0 (tabletop level) to a value of 350 mm (13.8").2") It is possible to carry out tomography in rapid sequence (sequential tomography). 20.

2." ON ↓ • Reached final position of: . Shutters. → ← Centering joystick activation ↑ Reset joystick activation ↑ NO → Alarm 060 ↑ → NO → Alarm 062 → ↑ ↑ NO → YES → Alarm 064 → ↑ YES ↓ Tomography in progress • "X-ray presence" input OFF with column still at Tomo (X-ray request ON) NO ↓ • X-ray presence ON for more than 0. shutters I.Cassette .I. Ready" within 3 secs.Collimator within 5 secs.36 secs.SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14. YES ↓ II step at the generator • Input "generat.Shutters . 3) Alarm 068 → ↑ YES → Alarm 069 → 14-5 APOLLO . or div.1 "Standard tomography" block diagram • • • • Tomo ON (ang+speed+div) Park cassette I. or div. YES ↓ • Column movement Start ↓ • Column in Tomo angle • "X-ray request" out ON ↓ • "X-ray presence" input ON within 0. collimator ↓ I step: • Movement towards exposure position of: Cassette. Column at 0° ← (Rev. request. Collimator • Grid movement start • Column towards load • Out "prep.7 sec from the end of Tomo (X-ray request OFF) NO ↓ YES • I and II step release with column centering ← ended NO ↓ ↑ Centering joystick YES activation.I.

shutters I.2 "Sequential tomography" block diagram → • • • • Tomo ON (ang+speed+div) Cassette park I. Collimator • Grid movement start • Column towards load • "Prep. YES ↓ II step at the generator • Input "generat.7 sec from the end of Tomo (X-ray request OFF) NO ↓ NO → Alarm 064 → ↑ YES → Alarm 068 → ↑ YES → Alarm 069 → NO ← • Start for next tomography X-ray control release YES ↓ YES • End of sequence with column centering ended ← NO ↓ ↑ YES Centering joystick activation. or div. collimator ↓ I step: • Movement towards position exposure of: . 3) .Cassette. Column at 0° ← APOLLO 14-6 (Rev.Ready" within 3 secs. request.I." out ON ↓ • Reaching final position of: .I.36 secs. YES ↓ Tomography in progress • "X-ray presence" input OFF with column still in Tomo (X-ray request ON) NO ↓ • X-ray presence ON for more than 0. Collimator within 5 secs. Shutters.SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14.Cassette. YES ↓ ← Centering joystick activation ↑ Reset joystick activation ↑ NO → Alarm 060 ↑ → NO → Alarm 062 → → • Column movement start ↓ • Column in Tomo angle • Out "X-ray request" ON ↓ ↑ ↑ • "X-ray presence" input ON within 0. Shutters.2. or div.

It is possible to carry out tests in exposure by operating the pedal commands (standard) or button controls (optional). The Spot Film Device in this phase does not perform the cassette carrying scan movement.3 Direct Both the X0-14 and X0-15 inputs are deactivated. grid vibration and shutters. The display indicates DIR. 3) 14-7 APOLLO . It is not possible to carry out investigations in fluoro because the fluoro request output towards the generator is disabled. (Rev. The preparation outputs.SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14. Neither the tomography nor the angio step mode can be selected. II step and exposure are sent to the generator and without conditioning. The collimator can only be selected in manual mode.

The Spot Film Device. APOLLO 14-8 (Rev. Input X0-14 is active. 3) . storage and processing device. while the shutters follow possible reductions carried out by the width axle of the collimator. The Apollo table has been designed and built to be connected to the digital systems VDR 2000. DIVA and DIVA-D.4 Digital This mode is possible only if the system is fitted with an image acquisition. if fitted. It is possible to carry out investigations in fluoro and in exposure by operating the pedal commands (standard) or button controls (optional). The collimator can only be selected in the automatic mode or automatic+hold. does not perform the cassette and grid vibration movement in this phase.SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14. The display shows the initials DIG.

SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14.36 secs. Ready" within 3 secs. YES ↓ Exposure in progress DSI Exposure frequency ↓ YES • I and II step release in any condition ← NO ↓ → ← Reset joystick activation NO → Alarm 062 → ↑ NO → ↑ Alarm 064 → ← ↑ (Rev. YES ↓ • "X-ray request" out ON ↓ • "X-ray presence" input ON within 0.4. request." ON ↓ II step at the generator • Input "generat. 3) 14-9 APOLLO .1 "Digital radiography" block diagram • Digital ON • No cass or cass in park ↓ I step: • Out "prep.

The difference consists in the image receiver that will instead be the I. of the film. 3) . The digital tomographic mode makes it possible to carry out tests with the same options of the standard tomographic mode.5 Digital Tomography The availability of this mode depends on the presence of a digital image acquisition system (see digital mode).SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14.I. APOLLO 14-10 (Rev.

YES ↓ • Movement column start ↓ • Column in Tomo angle • "X-ray request" out ON ↓ • "X-ray presence" input ON within 0. Column at 0° ← Alarm 069 → (Rev. request." ON ↓ II step at the generator • Input "generat.5.1 "Digital tomography" block diagram • Digital ON • Tomo ON (ang+speed) ↓ I step: • Column towards load • Out "prep.36 secs. 3) 14-11 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14.7 sec from the end of Tomo (X-ray request OFF) NO ↓ YES • I and II step release with column centering ← ended NO ↓ ↑ YES Centering joystick activation. → ← Centering joystick activation ↑ Reset joystick activation NO → Alarm 062 → ↑ ↑ NO → YES → Alarm 064 → ↑ YES ↓ • X-ray presence ON for more than 0. Ready" within 3 secs.

YES ↓ → • Column movement start ↓ • Column in Tomo angle • "X-ray request" out ON ↓ • "X-ray presence" input ON within 0.5." ON ↓ II step at the generator • Input "generat. 3) .36 secs. Ready" within 3 secs.SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14.2 "Digital tomography" block diagram • Digital ON • Tomo ON (ang+speed) ↓ I step: • Column towards load • Out "prep. ↑ → ← Centering joystick activation ↑ Reset joystick activation NO → Alarm 062 → ↑ ↑ NO → YES → Alarm 064 ↑ YES ↓ • X-ray presence ON for more than 0. request.7 sec from the end of Tomo (X-ray request OFF) NO ↓ NO • Start for next tomography X-ray control release ← YES ↓ YES • I and II step release with column centering ← ended NO ↓ Centering joystick YES activation. Column at 0° ← → ↑ Alarm 069 → APOLLO 14-12 (Rev.

When the Spot Film Device-I.SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14.I.I.. The step angiographic mode makes it possible to carry out tests of the peripheral artery circulation limiting the quantity of contrast liquid administered to the patient.II step-exposure make it possible to take digital images.-tube group completes the movement.I. field.-tube group with "steps" established by the size of the selected I.6 Angiographic Also this mode is only possible if the system is fitted with a digital acquisition system. (Rev. the prep. 3) 14-13 APOLLO . The mode provides for the movement of the Spot Film Device-I.

YES ↓ • "X-ray request" out ON ↓ • "X-ray presence" input ON within 0.SERVICE MANUAL Operating mode 14. Ready" within 3 secs. request" out ON • Scan movement start per step YES ↓ → ↑ NO → Alarm 064 → ↑ NO → Alarm 078 → NO ← Next station • Scan position reached • Last station YES ↓ Program end APOLLO 14-14 (Rev.1 "Stepping angio" block diagram • • • • Angiografic mode select. aborted NO → Alarm 062 I station: I step: • "Digital prep. per exposure interruption ↓ I step: (within 15 sec) • "Digital prep. request" out ON YES ↓ II step at the generator • Input "generat. Digital ON Scan positioning Station choice ↓ ← ↑ Reset joystick activation alarms ↑ • Progr.6. 3) .36 secs. YES ↓ • Exposure release and prep.

the reason for this situation being created must be identified. The emergency microswitches are connected in series and.SERVICE MANUAL Emergency end run 15 RUN EMERGENCY END R All the table movements are stopped by the software at the limits established by the potmeters and stored in the EEprom. the emergency microswitch positioned immediately after the end of the run software. 3) 15-1 APOLLO . of the operator and the table if there is a malfunction. All the table movements are equipped with hardware emergency end runs. if the circuit opens. All the power circuits are broken ensuring the total safety of the patient. is engaged. (Rev. The part that has engaged the emergency switch must be identified by the following table: Switch S32 S44 S45 S46 S47 S48 S49 S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 S55 Organ Main beam-middle beam SID SID Tabletop Tabletop Middle beam Middle beam Angulation Angulation Scan Scan Main beam Main beam Side Main beam-middle beam collision LOW HIGH Inner Outer Minimum Maximum Head Feet Feet Head Minimum Maximum After turning off the system. power is cut to the power supply main switch K1L. in case the software fails to stop for a malfunction. The opening of the main switch K1L also determines the opening of the "power circuit OK" input (X15 pin 10) that generates diagnosis 080.

so if the cause of the failure is not removed. Release button S1. WARNING: If button S1 is pressed. 4. Wait till the end of the initialisation cycle. in the direction opposite that of the emergency. the series of emergency microswitches is overridden. APOLLO 15-2 (Rev. 3.SERVICE MANUAL Emergency end run Once the cause has been removed. Use the joystick which caused the emergency situations. 2. Press reset button S1 in the electrical cabinet. do the following to restore operation: 1. there will be the danger that the movement follows its run without any electrical protection. 3) . Turn on the equipment keeping the button pressed down.

3) 16-1 APOLLO . This adjustment varies both the speeds the collimator motors use.1 Collimator axle speed adjustment • • Trimmer to be adjusted: R15-R20-R25. and is applied when an axle is at distance from the set point that is greater than the slowdown band (cells 232. 234). This speed is always used with activation of the joysticks. by means of a hardware partition deactivated by a processor command. LEDs 26.TP4: height collimator motor and can assume a value between 0 and 8 Vdc that will correspond proportionally to the value of the voltage at the motors from 0 to 24 Vdc. • (Rev.TP1: width collimator motor – TP10 (gnd) . The rotation of the trimmer in a clockwise direction increases the speeds. Function: – R15: width collimator axle speed adjustment – R20: height collimator axle speed adjustment – R25: iris collimator axle speed adjustment Procedure of adjustment: The adjustment of these trimmers makes it possible to vary the speeds of the collimator axle movement motor. The high speed is the one directly obtained from the relative trimmer adjustment. The low speed is activated when the axle enters the slowdown zone. It is in fact possible to verify the adjustment in terms of both reference voltages at the operating devices and directly on the Power supply motors. Here below you will find information about how to operate on them. It is possible to measure the reference voltage to the operational IC for the collimator shutters movement between: – TP10 (gnd) . 233.SERVICE MANUAL Hardware adjustment 16 16. 16.1 HARDWARE ADJUSTMENT A3 output PCB The trimmers used for the collimator Axle Adjustment Movements are on the A3 output PCB. 29 and 32 indicate when the high speed is activated. The trimmers are of the 20 rev. The possibility of monitoring this adjustment is double.1. The low speed is applied. type.

TP7: iris collimator motor and can assume a value between 0 and 3.5 Vdc that will correspond proportionally to the value of the voltage at the motors from 0 to 10 Vdc.TP9: iris collimator motor. It will be possible to check the voltage at the ends of the motors thanks to the : – TP2 . APOLLO 16-2 (Rev.TP3: width collimator motor – TP5 . The required adjustment is obtained when the voltage at the ends of the motors the measured voltage is 24 Vdc throughout the range of movement at high speed.TP6: height collimator motor – TP8 . 3) .SERVICE MANUAL Hardware adjustment It is possible to measure the reference voltage to the operational IC for the iris collimator shutters movement between: – TP10 (gnd) .

• (Rev. To obtain the adjustment required do the following for each of the axles: 1. this gain provides a higher torque in order to overcome the hardening. The trimmers are twenty turn types. The gain increases when the trimmer is turned in a clockwise direction. turn the trimmer again by 1 turn in an anticlockwise direction. 3) 16-3 APOLLO . since in points where mechanical hardening of the movement is possible. When the self-oscillation stops.SERVICE MANUAL Hardware adjustment 16. A good adjustment of this gain makes it possible to get an even movement that is free of vibrations. When the axle begins to wobble.1. Turn the trimmer of the axle to be adjusted in a clockwise direction (+). Function: – R38: width collimator axle torque gain adjustment – R48: height collimator axle torque gain adjustment – R58: iris collimator axle torque gain adjustment Adjustment procedure: The adjustment of these trimmers makes it possible to adjust the torque gain of the gripper movement motor.2 Adjustment of collimator axle torque gain (armature reaction) • • Trimmer to be adjusted: R38-R48-R58. 2. turn the trimmer in an anticlockwise direction. 3.

3) .2 Compressor PCB The activation of the compressor movements. a voltage of 9 Vdc must be read at test points TP4 and TP5 • • APOLLO 16-4 (Rev. to ensure that the movement is: • sufficiently high in the compression and patient release zone • sufficiently slow in the stretch from the park to the field • with speed identical to the field entrance speed. The control of the motor and the speed change switch S31 are dependent on PCB A15 (Figure 16-1) that has the function of "managing the power" of the motor. To correctly carry out the adjustment of these 3 speeds the table must be horizontal and the column taken to 0° degrees.SERVICE MANUAL Hardware adjustment 16. Adjustment of speed towards the park When the compressor is piloted towards the parking position. each having the function of adjusting one speed. In this condition the compressor equipment masses act unfavourably. making the adjustment optimal in any condition. with active movement in this zone. that can be regulated by means of trimmer R40. With motor in movement in the up/down zone.e. There are 3 trimmers on this PCB. the stop at the microswitches end run and reaching the set compression forces are managed by the software and controlled by output PCB A3. a voltage of 32 Vdc must be measured at the test points TP4 and TP5 to be obtained by means of the adjustment trimmer R38. is used. The compressor motor in fact is controlled with 3 different speeds i. • Adjustment of compression speed This adjustment must be carried out first of all because it influences the other two. Adjustment of exit speeds from the park When the compressor is piloted from the parking zone until switch S31 is active. This speed can be adjusted by means of the trimmer R39 and. The K14 and K15 relays are responsible for the movement activation. When the movement is active in this stretch. a mechanical system starts the cone rotating speed change switch S31 is activated. This determines the selection of the input speed. a voltage of 11 Vdc must be read on the test points TP4 and TP5. at the end of the vertical ascent stretch. the input speed. when brought from field to park.

SERVICE MANUAL Hardware adjustment Figure 16-1 (Rev. 3) 16-5 APOLLO .

SERVICE MANUAL Hardware adjustment THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 16-6 (Rev. 3) .

angulation and scan or main beam and middle beam.7K – EC. 3) 17-1 APOLLO . (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Three-phase inverter 17 THREE-PHASE INVERTER The inverters in the Apollo table's electrical cabinet are used to control the 4 three-phase motors responsible for the movements of: tilting. angulation and scan. Only 2 motors will be piloted at a time. The output of the inverter in fact is connected to the motor to be activated through the action of 4 remote switches. The model of the inverter is: MITSHUBISHI model FR-E540 – 3. lift.

This input's usage dial is determined by parameter Pr73 (Pr73=1 range 0V +10V with motor stop at 0 V). Number of the terminal L1-L2-L3 Function Input of three phase 400 V 50/60 Hz power supply. This speed will be proportional to the maximum speed set in parameter Pr38. Output of 380 V motor power supply with variable frequency between 0 and 120 Hz. This terminal is polarised at 0 V fixed. signal (terminal 2). This pair of terminals depends on a relay contact inside the inverter. Only when the inverter has finished the ramp will it be possible to exchange the connection to the motor by means of the remote power switch. This the output signal from the inverter (active at 0 V) present when the inverter is in movement (acceleration and deceleration ramps included). This terminal is polarised at fixed 0 V. Input of speed reference from 0 to +10 V dc. 3) . When this input is polarised at 0 V the inverter pilots the motor in the "FORWARD" direction. This the common (reference 0 V) for the STR and STF signals. requires the use of the commands listed below. The contacts of the 2 inverters are connected in series and depend on an input of input PCB A2. the inverter selects the second set of operational parameters. In the case of failure the contact is open. The speed of the motor will be proportional to the input signal in this terminal.1 Inverter input/output functions The connection of the inverter. This contact is closed when the inverter is under normal functioning conditions. When this input is polarised at 0 V. This is the pole of the open collector for the RUN signal.SERVICE MANUAL Three-phase inverter 17. The main beam and middle beam motors actually use a different booster value from the one necessary for the angulation and scan motors. When this input is polarised at 0 V the inverter pilots the motor in the "BACK" direction. U-V-W SE 5 SD RUN STF STR 2 A-C RL APOLLO 17-2 (Rev. This output is used to enable the processor to recognise the end of the ramp. This terminal is polarised at fixed 0 V. in the specific application for the Apollo equipment. The inversion of the wires to terminals L1-L2-L3 does not change the rotation. In the case of inverted motor rotation these outputs must be reversed. It is the reference 0 V for the V ref.

it is however possible to consult the dedicated manual.2 Inverter hardware setting The inverter FR-E540 . 17. Some of these are not active in the specific application on Apollo. (Rev. others are used but the data contained is the default settings contained in the basic inverter program. so even if modified they will not change the functioning of the equipment. supplied together with the equipment. while those parameters that do not lead to any effect on the functioning of the equipment are not mentioned. some parameters are modified with respect to the default value by Villa Sistemi Medicali to adapt the functioning for use by Apollo.3. For a complete and detailed knowledge of the functioning of the inverter.3 Inverter software parameters setting To permit the use of the FR-E540 . Since Apollo has been designed in NPN logic.3.7K – EC inverter in the most various applications. the "jumper" will have to be in the position SINK. In conclusion. 3) 17-3 APOLLO . The selection of this functioning is by means of the SINK / SOURCE "jumper" on the front of the inverter below the cover. a large number of parameters that can be set are present in the memory.7K – EC is designed to accept inputs and pilot outputs in PNP logic (high active) or NPN (low active).SERVICE MANUAL Three-phase inverter 17. The modified parameters and the non-modified parameters but ones that interact on the functioning of Apollo are listed below and divided into two groups.

20 Pr. the inverter must not cut in with corrections in this function. Rated motor voltage.0 20 Pr. The value of 13 KHz makes it possible to eliminate the noise provided by the movement of the motor guaranteeing however a low risk of EMC emissions.9 0 Pr. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors.0 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input RL. This parameter indicates the limit of the current supplied to the motor during functioning at various speeds. See Pr.7 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input RL.8 0 Pr. This the maximum output frequency that the inverter supplies to the motor when the analogue input of the reference signal is at the maximum value (+10 V). Acceleration ramp (1st parameter set).44 Pr. Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali Data Function Boost at the start (1st parameters set). the inverter must not cut in with corrections in this function.19 Pr. The rated frequency characteristic of the motor used must be inserted in this parameter. the message OL is shown on the display without a stop in operations. See Pr. This data is the reference frequency value for the acceleration and deceleration parameters. The rated voltage characteristic of the motor used must be included in this parameter.1 Param.47 Pr.SERVICE MANUAL Three-phase inverter 17.3 Pr. Stall prevention extreme current. Rated motor frequency (1st parameter set). Pr. when the threshold of the maximum continuous current limit that can be delivered by the inverter is exceeded. Since the Apollo processor determines the acceleration of the movement depending on the PDI function. When setting 0. See Pr. 3) .22 Pr.72 400 100 150 90 0 0 6 50 13 Pr.3 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input RL. Activation of the functioning block for excessive current to the motor. See Pr.8 but relative to the nd set of parameters in function of the input RL.73 1 APOLLO 17-4 (Rev.3. Excessive adjustment generates a start of the movement that is too brusque.38 Pr. This value is used for the angulation and scan motors (see input RL). This parameter provides the motor with a boost at the start that enables the inertia of the system to be compensated for. Since the Apollo processor determines the deceleration of the movement depending on the PDI function.46 Pr. while not enough adjustment can cause the non-start of the movement in load conditions. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors. This the PWM frequency sent to the motor. This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors. Deceleration ramp (1st parameter set). This data is used for the main beam and middle beam motors. This the parameter that determines the minimum and maximum value that the reference analogue input for the speed can assume (0 +10 Vdc).7 50 0 Pr.45 Pr.

This enables the status relay whose exchange contact refers to terminals A-B-C (used for OK inverter) deactivating it with inverter OFF or in state of alarm. The data 0 guarantees an immediate response of the inverter when the Vref reference signal changes. This turns on the cooling fans of the power jumper only if the inverter is running or if the operating temperature has exceeded the values allowed. This makes it possible for the terminal RL to perform the 2nd set of parameters setting function.192 Data 1 2 2 3 11 Function This is the speed reference analogue signal software filter.244 1 (Rev.180 Pr. Pr. This is the parameter that makes it possible to enable the functions of the inverter from outside signals sent to the terminal block. Pr.SERVICE MANUAL Three-phase inverter Param.74 Pr.79 Pr. This data enables the modification of the parameters. 3) 17-5 APOLLO .77 Pr.

FU terminal funct.13 Pr.41 Pr. select.191 Pr.11 Pr. select.1 Pr. Nevertheless.151 Pr. 3) .160 Pr.240 50 0 1 0 0 0 14 0 0 150 0 5.63 Pr.43 Pr.75 Pr.55 Pr.SERVICE MANUAL Three-phase inverter 17. RH terminal funct.5 6 0.183 Pr.67 Pr. Consult the inverter manual provided together with the machine for more thorough information.18 Pr. current 9999 Deceleration ref. if modified. Freq. Data Pr.171 Pr.158 Pr.152 Pr.2 Pr.12 Pr. Param.69 Pr.182 Pr. The description of the function of all this data is reported briefly. ref./decelerat.71 Pr.150 Pr.3. in case of doubt or malfunctioning. end of scale Smart mode selection Param. MRS terminal funct. Output frequency threshold Reverse output frequency threshold PU display variable select. select.5 0 120 0 0 50 10 6 9999 0 50 4 0 Function Maximum frequency Minimum frequency DC braking (voltage) DC braking (time) DC braking (voltage) Start frequency Load selection curve Max high speed frequency Accelerat. select.65 120 0 3 0.0 0.70 Pr. with ref. this list is given to permit. current 0 Automatic reset selection APOLLO 17-6 (Rev.60 Pr. Parameter group reading selection Funct. time increase Machine speed indication Freq.2 Parameters that maintain the default settings Listed here below are the parameters that. select.56 Pr.21 Pr. Data Pr. PU stop Inversion disabling PID action selection Current threshold level Current control time Current threshold level 0 Current control time 0 AM terminal variab.62 Pr.5 0 0 0 1 2 6 4 1 Function Current limit reduction frequency Number of alarm resets Automatic reset wait time Reset count zeroing Special braking service Choice of motor Select: reset. 20 mA Comparison of rated/real val.61 Pr.68 Pr.181 Pr.42 Pr. to check the parameter values are correct.78 Pr. end of scale Current indic.153 Pr. indicat.39 Pr.52 Pr. hour counter reset RM terminal funct.10 Pr. could jeopardise the proper functioning of the equipment.14 Pr.128 Pr.66 Pr. PWM soft setting 9999 Reference current 9999 Accelerat.37 Pr.

To store the hundreds value press the SET key. P. NOTE: When the MODE key is pressed the first time. To modify another parameter press the SET key. The tens digit flashes. 9. the display will show the writing Pr. 8. To modify the data in the memory. Press the SET key.SERVICE MANUAL Three-phase inverter 17.000 will be shown on the screen with hundreds digit flashing. press the 5 keys to increase the values or 6 to decrease them.4 Access to parameters for writing If it is necessary to check the values input into the parameters or modify them. press the 5 keys to increase the values or 6 to decrease them. Help. press the 5 and 6 keys and scroll through the list. To select the required parameter. carry out the operations listed below to access the memory of the inverter. To modify the data. 13. 1. 10. To store the tens value press the SET key. press the 5 keys to increase the values or 6 to decrease them. 3) 17-7 APOLLO . With the inverter in standby remove the front cover door. To confirm the modification press the SET key and hold it down for 3 secs. Press the MODE key. G (Rev. 7. 11. The unit digit flashes. press the 5 keys to increase the values or 6 to decrease them. 12. 5. Press the SET key. 6. the display shows Opnd and the second. 2. the next parameter is shown on the display. 4. 3. At this point the value in the selected parameter is shown. 14. Repeat the modification procedure or press the MODE key three times to exit the routine. To modify the data. To modify the hundreds data. As a confirmation of the successful storage to memory the display indicates the number of the cell and the value of the data flashing them alternately. This display shows the possibility of accessing 2 routines that are not used.

WARNING: The inverter is now in PU mode that means enabling movements also from the keyboard. the display shows the help mode. 4. Press the MODE key to exit the reset procedure. before activating the functions of the equipment again the data in the table "Parameters with data modified by Villa Sistemi Medicali" must be reset and the data contained in the "Parameters that maintain the default settings" table must be checked. 6.77 parameters first followed by Pr. Reprogram the data by modifying Pr. 3) . on the display 5. The display begins to flash indicating that the default settings has been stored to memory. 3. 8.5 Procedure for restoring the default parameters WARNING: This procedure must only be activated if a malfunction has occurred in the inverter that has compromised all the settings. When this procedure is carried out. Press the 5 key four times until getting the indication ALLC.79 is restored at value 2. Following the indications in the "Access to the parameters for writing " paragraph select the cell Pr. So. 1.79 to make access possible to all the other parameters. Press the MODE key. Carry out the procedure described here below paying the greatest attention. Press for 2 secs. the key SET To confirm. Press key 5 to show the data 1. 9. the default values in the various parameters will be stored to memory. Press the MODE key. 7. APOLLO 17-8 (Rev. It is therefore essential to pay the greatest attention to the use of the keys until the data contained in parameter Pr. the data 0 is shown. the display shows the PU mode.79 and change the data stored with the value 1.SERVICE MANUAL Three-phase inverter 17. Pressing the SET key. 2.

3) 18-1 APOLLO . Figure 18-1 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Function of the outputs card LEDS 18 FUNCTION OF THE OUTPUTS PCB LEDS On the A3 outputs PCB (Figure 18-1) there are groups of leds that indicate the condition of the active output.

I. 3) APOLLO .I.SERVICE MANUAL Function of the outputs card LEDS The correspondence between the various functions and the leds are listed below.I.I. field selection activation of K2 ready relay controlled by the main processor • • H2 LED GROUP LED 9 (Out 8) LED 10 (Out 9) LED 11 (Out 10) LED 12 (Out 11) LED 13 (Out 12) LED 14 (Out 13) LED 15 (Out 14) LED 16 (Out 15) H3 LED GROUP LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23) spare spare SID up SID down main beam motor brake release middle beam motor brake release angulation motor brake release scan motor brake release • I. lift down tabletop inside tabletop outside compressor up compressor down collimator lamp on width collimator opens • H4 LED GROUP LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 24) 25) 26) 27) 28) 29) 30) 31) width collimator closes width collimator fast height collimator opens height collimator closes height collimator fast iris collimator opens iris collimator closes iris collimator fast 18-2 (Rev. field selection medium I. lift up I.I. field selection maximum I. H1 LED GROUP LED 1 (Out 0) LED 2 (Out 1) LED LED LED LED LED LED 3 4 5 6 7 8 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) K7M and K9M (angulation and scan) remote switch call K6M and K8M (main beam and middle beam) remote switch call R-L monitor image scan reverse HIGH-LOW monitor image scan reverse minimum I.

4) 18-3 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Function of the outputs card LEDS • H5 LED GROUP LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 32) 33) 34) 35) 36) 37) 38) 39) angulation-main beam inverter forward angulation-main beam inverter back middle beam-scan inverter forward middle beam-scan inverter back spare spare tomo 2nd speed tomo 3rd speed • H6 LED GROUP LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 40) 41) 42) 43) 44) 45) 46) 47) fluoro request X-ray request preparation request digital preparation request second step preparation request tomo 1st speed tomo 4th speed tomo 7° • H7 LED GROUP LED 49 (Out 48) LED 50 (Out 49) LED 51 (Out 50) LED 52 (Out 51) LED 53 (Out 52) LED 54 (Out 53) LED 55 (Out 54) LED 56 (Out 55) tomo 20° tomo 30° tomo 45° X-ray presence without request Kv automatic-manual fluoro spare spare angio step start • H8 LED GROUP LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 56) 57) 58) 59) 60) 61) 62) 63) motion detection CCD x0 CCD x4 CCD x8 grid in field grid in park cassette gripper opening cassette gripping (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Function of the outputs card LEDS • H9 FUNCTION LEDS LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out (Out 64) 65) 66) 67) 68) 69) 70) 71) R cassette motor direction L cassette motor direction shutter motor direction cross subdivision motor direction R cassette motor enabling L cassette motor enabling shutter motor enabling cross subdivision motor enabling APOLLO 18-4 (Rev. 3) .

1 (Rev. and the shutters it will be necessary to exclude the automatic function of the collimator that could interfere in limiting the size. the message " Service function active" appears on the control desk display. however once the installation of the system has been completed. 19. 3) 19-1 APOLLO . To verify the correct position of the cassette. both longitudinal and transversal.SERVICE MANUAL Checking the radiographic exposure results 19 CHECKING THE RADIOGRAPHIC EXPOSURE RESULTS Spot Film Device adjustment The Spot Film Device is adjusted and checked when the equipment is made. a further adjustment might be necessary after carrying out the test radiographs. To open the collimator axles automatically to the maximum size data 1 must be input in cell 262. When this function is active.

but the constancy of this dimension. 4.1. Another possibility is that of changing the data in cell 219 which modifies all the runs of all the subdivisions of the same quantity. To adjust the positioning properly it is possible to change the gains of the PDI function in the cell of group 300. Run the program and develop the film.1 Checking the longitudinal positioning of the cassette The cassette positioning with regard to the X-ray main beam. APOLLO 19-2 (Rev. The correction can be carried out by working on these data because the position error is determined by the difference that the error assumes in function of the length of the run. 2. Insert a 40x20 (17"x7") cassette and select the subdivision for 4 in line. If the separation lines are different. The 3 white radiogram separation lines must be the same width. 3. For this verification the dimension of the separation line. The modification of these parameters can give rise to different effects. during the exposure program. Carry out the same test with a 35x35 (14"x14") cassette divided into 3. it means that the positioning of the cassette is wrong in all its exposures.SERVICE MANUAL Checking the radiographic exposure results 19. As a further possibility the single runs can be changed through the data set in the cells of group 400. An effective method for this verification is provided by the following procedure: 1. determined by the shutters is not important. must be correct. so an intervention should only be made if the functioning of PDI method is well understood. 3) .

SERVICE MANUAL Checking the radiographic exposure results

19.1.2

Checking the transversal positioning of the cassette
By carrying out a series of radiograms with a cross layout of a film 18x24 (8"x10") or 30x24 (12"x10"), a continuous line of separation between the upper and lower radiograms some 2 mm (0.08") thick must be obtained. If this does not happen it means that the transversal movement of the cassette is wrong. Having determined whether the defect is caused by an asymmetrical movement with respect to the centre or by too great or too small a movement for both sides, change the value set in cells 459 and 460.

19.1.3

Checking the positioning of the shutters
WARNING: During these tests do not carry out limitations of the collimator width by means of the joystick because the shutters follow the collimator. Carry out the exposure on films of various formats and various subdivisions. All the separator lines, in the various dimensions and subdivisions must be the same width. If this not the case, change the data contained in the cells of group 400, in such a way as to obtain what is required. It must be remembered that the correction in mm made in the cells has the effect of increasing and decreasing the final amount, equal to the value of the correction. As an example let’s consider that a two line subdivision with width cassette 30 cm (12") results from a minimum separation line (0.5 mm). Since the desired value is 2 mm, the quantity of 1.5 mm is added to the value in cell 549 (the absolute value of which is not important as it depends on the characteristics of the system).

(Rev. 3)

19-3

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Checking the radiographic exposure results

19.2
19.2.1

Centering the collimator, checking the X-ray field
Alignment of the X-ray beam with collimator diaphragm
NOTE: Before starting the alignment of the X-ray beam it is necessary to ensure the column is properly vertical and the hood is properly horizontal; these checks can be carried out mechanically through the use of a level. 1. Bring the SID at 100 cm (39.4"). 2. Place a tool consisting of two concentric rings positioned at a distance of a few cm over the tabletop surface. If the dedicated tool is not available, a replacement tool can be made using two elements of different diameters (see Figure 19-1). 3. Close the collimator to get an image size similar to the size of the tool (a way that both the circles of the tool are completely represented in the image). 4. Select fluoro and check the concentricity of the two rings. 5. If the concentricity is correct (Figure 19-1), go to point 8; otherwise continue.
Tube focus Collimator centre
Move the collimator in this direction

G

min 200 mm

Correct centering

Figure 19-1

APOLLO

19-4

(Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL Checking the radiographic exposure results

6. Move the collimator with respect to the X-ray tube using the adjustment possible in the coupling cone: the collimator must move in the same direction as the circle furthest from the tabletop should be moved to become concentric with the circle resting on the tabletop. 7. Move the tool in the same direction to reposition it in the centre of the X-ray field (in such a way that both circles of the tool are completely represented in the image). Repeat points 6 and 7, by trial and error, until the two circles are centred. 8. Move the SID to 150 cm (59.0") and check that the centering is maintained; if this not the case, check the perpendicularity and repeat the procedure from point 4. 9. Once the concentricity has been achieved at both the SIDs, the verticality of the alignment between the focus of the X-ray tube and the centre of the collimator is guaranteed.

(Rev. 3)

19-5

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Checking the radiographic exposure results

19.3

Alignment of X-ray beam with light beam
NOTE: This procedure can be applied to systems that fit the Villa model collimator. For systems fitting the Ralco mode collimator, refer to the specific manual. NOTE: The light field of the collimator is adjusted in the factory, both for lamp position and for position of the image surface, so, once the centering of the X-ray beam has been carried out, the alignment of the X-ray beam – light beam should be guaranteed. 1. To check the alignment of the X-ray beam – light beam, turn on the light field and position 4 wads of absorbent material at the 4 edges of the light field. 2. Expose a film and check the position of the wads with respect to the X-ray field produced on the film; the maximum misalignment must be equal to 3% of the SID in each direction and the sum in the two orthogonal directions must not be over 4%. 3. If the dimensions do not coincide (indicator of the fact that the distance of the focus of the X-ray tube from the image surface is different from that of the lamp collimator from the same plan) the collimator lamp can be adjusted, remembering that when the lamp focus is brought towards the mirror, the light main beam gets narrower while it grows bigger when it is moved away.
Tube focus Tube focus Tube focus

G G

Light

Light

Light

Proper alignment

Lamp movement

Mirror movement

Figure 19-2 4. When the optimal alignment between light field and X-ray field is achieved the next step can be taken to align the X-ray field and image receiver (I.I. and Spot Film Device group). These adjustments are easily obtained by moving the tube-collimator integral group on the support using the adjustment margin allowed. Furthermore, the I.I. allows a minimum of adjustment in its fixing
APOLLO

19-6

(Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL Checking the radiographic exposure results

while, in cases where the Spot Film Device needs adjusting (the adjustment of which is governed by software and set in the factory), it is necessary to work referring to the procedures for the adjustment and setting of the data in the relative memory cells in the relative chapter of this manual. The intervention on the I.I. and Spot Film Device group is only required when in fact it has not been possible to mechanically centre these two parts very well, but this happens rarely as this adjustment is carried out in the factory.

(Rev. 3)

19-7

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Checking the radiographic exposure results

19.4

Collimator adjustment
The collimator is adjusted and checked when the equipment is made. Nevertheless, once installation is complete it will be necessary to check the size of the collimated formats. For the fluoro formats check that the axles are tangent to the I.I. diameter. This check can be carried out by operating the collimator joystick and checking that the shutters are immediately visible. This must happen at all the possible zoom levels and the adjustment is made through the setting of cells 214, 215, 216 and 217.

G

NOTE: When width reduction is made by joystick, both collimator and shutters are responsible of the reduction. Can happens that collimator and SFD are not perfectly aligned, so in this case the image on monitor has a side well limited and the other with a shadow. This because one side is limited by collimator and the other by shutters. To avoid this condition is possible to modify the shutters position in comparison with collimator but for joystick limitation only, by using the value inserted into cell 241. For models equipped with the Spot Film Device, use the various formats and check that the collimator covers the selected surface. Also check that the collimated format does not exceed 3% of the SID, the format of the film or its subdivision. To carry out this check, insert a cassette in the Spot Film Device and position a cassette measuring 35x35 (14"x14") on the tabletop. Take an exposure and develop the 35x35 (14"x14") film. By calculating the distance between the film in the Spot Film Device and the one on the surface check that the collimated format on the 35x35 (14"x14") film corresponds to the size of the film in the Spot Film Device after making the appropriate proportion. The correction of the formats can be carried out in 2 ways: • by varying the data set in cell 218 that modifies all the format collimation positionings except for the minimum position (collimator closed) • by modifying the adjustment of the potmeter minimum following the description in the dedicated paragraph.

APOLLO

19-8

(Rev. 3)

SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

20

DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Any failure that might occur during the use of the Apollo table is, in the majority of cases, indicated by a diagnosis message that is shown on the display. In some cases however, failures can occur that do not affect the electronic logic of the processor. This chapter is therefore divided into two parts: the first describes the faults deriving from displayed alarms and the way they can be solved, the second describes faults of different types.

(Rev. 3)

20-1

APOLLO

SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APOLLO

20-2

(Rev. 3)

If the level is low (0 V) even in conditions of non-emission. Solutions: For collimator A. after some time on. select the panoramic size and press preparation. Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. Insert a cassette 35x43 (14"x17"). remove the wire coming from the generator and connected to X0-13 and carry out the measurement again. one or both of the leds do not come on B. so if the set point is not reached the reason could be a fault in the power driver circuit located in the SFD power pcb (A4). 230. the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.1 Error 59 Troubleshooting for displayed diagnoses Diagnosis Rays from generator without fluoro or exposure request Cause of the alarm It was detected the presence of X-rays coming from the generator (access X0-13 active) without fluoro / exposure request or X-ray ON is still present after 700ms from fluoro / exposure request released In Spot Film Device mode. Corrective measures The signal must be at high level when the generator does not emit rays. 60 Timeout collimator or shutters positioning in standard program When the preparation is activated or when cassette ejection is required. leds 24 and 25 or 27 and 28 flash For shutters check that at prep command the movement starts to open. For collimator leds 24 and 27 of the output PCB must come on indicating the movement in progress. 231). the width or height motor control circuit is faulty (output PCB) B. one or both the leds stay on C. 4) 20-3 APOLLO . the movement is unstable therefore there are mechanical backlashes on the movement between motor and potmeter or the potmeter is damaged electrically. 3 cases might occur: A.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 20. (Rev. but this entails an increase in the tolerance of the collimated size). A temporary solution to this defect might be the increase of the dead band (cells 229. one of the collimator axles or shutters did not reach the position set point within 5 secs. the collimator and the shutters must be positioned over the cassette size or subdivision. If the defect persists. Shutters are controlled by PDI system. the position feedback circuit or the relative potmeter are faulty C.

Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter.5 secs. 63 Rapid sequence stopped by The rapid sequence was operator interrupted by releasing the X-ray control. in exposure. If the defect persists. The level must be low (0 V) when the generator begins the emission but it must turn off after 6. The level must be low (0 V) when the generator has completed the preparation operations. the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB. the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.5 sec even if the X-ray request remains active. 64 65 Generator did not stop exposure The generator X-ray time A radiography carried out on the Spot Film Device can last for a maximum of 6. Corrective measures The description of alarm 60 applies. lasted longer than 6.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 61 Diagnosis Collimator or shutters positioning timeout in rapid sequence mode Cause of the alarm In rapid sequence mode. The generator did not activate the “ready” signal within 3 secs. X-ray on not present from generator The generator did not activate the "X-ray" signal within 3 secs. Remove the wire coming from the generator connected on X0-12 and make a jumper directly to the ground on this terminal. so there cannot be hardware defects at this level.360 secs. The preparation request is then sent to CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus. 62 Ready from generator not present Check between X13-1 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. one of the collimator axles or shutters did not reach the position set point within 5 secs. If the defect persists. Remove the wire coming from the generator connected on X0-13 during the emission. Check the preparation and X-ray switches on the pedal command and the relative circuits depending on connector X41. If the defect persists.5 secs. from the request of X-ray II step. Remove the wire coming from the generator connected on X0-13 and make a direct jumper to ground on this terminal when the table activates the X-ray request. APOLLO 20-4 (Rev. from the fluoro request or within 0. Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The fault could be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation or Xray circuit. 3) . The level must be low (0 V) when the generator begins the emission. the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.

Check the X-ray control switch on the pedal control and the relative circuit depending on connector X41. The fault might be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation circuit. after the X-ray control was deactivated. so there cannot be hardware defects at this level. The compressor did not reach the parking position within 30 secs. from the activation of the control for the access in tomo or angio modality access. If the defect persists. Check that the generator does not show a “tail” of this signal for more than 700 msecs. 70 Compressor did not reach park position in tomo and angio modality (Rev. A tomography has a X-ray time determined by the presence of the column in the Tomo angle. The table logic activates the return of the compressor to the park when access to tomographic or angiographic mode is requested. the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 66 Diagnosis Exposure command released before end of Xray time Preparation command released before end of Xray time Generator stopped X-ray during Tomo angle Cause of the alarm Exposure request released before X-ray time (input X0-13) finished. The level must stay low (0 V) for the entire time column is in the Tomo angle. If the compressor does not reach the parking position (switch S26. If the defect persists. Corrective measures The fault might be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the X-ray request circuit. input X15-2 input PCB) the fault might be on the compressor motor control circuit (outlets X26 pin 9 and 10 output PCB) or on the A15 power PCB. The preparation request is then sent to the CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus. The level must go high when the table deactivates the X-ray request. After the X-ray request of the table is off. 67 68 69 Generator did not stop exposure at the end of Tomo angle The generator continued the X-ray emission for more than 0. The X-ray request is then sent to the CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus. 3) 20-5 APOLLO . Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with an oscilloscope. Preparation request released before X-ray time (input X0-13) finished. The table will therefore be responsible for turning off the emission. so there can be no hardware defects at this level. A check must also be made to see that the X15-2 input depending on the park switch is at a high level when the compressor has activated the switch.2 secs. Make a jumper between X0-13 and the ground for the tomography time. Check between X13-2 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. The generator interrupted the X-ray emission before the tomography angle was completed. the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB. Check the preparation switch on the pedal control and the relative circuit depending on connector X41.

so there cannot be hardware defects at this level. The table can be configured for the anti-pinching control (cell 254). with one of the collimator setting axles cells active (ad 117 to 122) an attempt is made to store the value to memory but the SID (shown on the display) does not correspond to 980 mm. power relay K1L. Check the membrane circuit series and the Spot Film Device PCB A10. The SID has not been set properly. with cell 133 active an attempt is made to move the I. 80 General emergency The power relay (input The logic recognises that the power circuit of the table is not active if the input X15-10 X15-10) was deactivated by is not at low level. therefore the adjustment of the components inside the Spot Film Device is not possible. The anti-pinching control circuit is interrupted.I. This since this input is dependent on the secondary contact of the external causes. lift not present Wrong SID The I. If the defect persists. This signal is not caused by a fault.I. lift is not present in In potmeter adjustment mode. The Spot Film Device was disabled. The fault might be caused by a fault in this circuit or by the break in the series circuit of the movement emergency switch (X0 pin 5 and 6). Remove the wire coming from the generator connected on X0-12 and make a direct jumper to ground on this terminal when the table activates the X-ray request.I. If the control is active. The level must be low (0 V) when the exposure procedure in digital mode is activated.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 77 Diagnosis Preparation request interrupted by digital DSI Cause of the alarm In angiographic mode the generator ready signal is absent. the Xray sequence was interrupted before the set number of steps was completed. the fault might be in the pull-up circuit of the input PCB or on the port of input 74HC245 (integrated D21) of the CPU PCB. the input X14-5 (input PCB) must be active (0 V). Corrective measures Check between X13-1 (input PCB) and ground with a multimeter. APOLLO 20-6 (Rev. The fault could be caused by an operator error or by a defect in the preparation and Xray circuit. but by the request of a Spot Film Device function if cell 261 is set at 1. The preparation request is then sent to the CPU PCB via serial Can-Bus. Check the preparation and X-ray switches on the pedal command and the relative circuits depending on connector X41. 3) . but the setting of the presence of this function (cell 255 is 1). the system. In potmeter adjustment mode. 82 Anti-crusching circuit damaged SFD is disabled 83 84 88 I. lift. 78 Program aborted In angio modality.

the main beam has accumulated a position error above the one set in cell 346. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. EEPROM data damaged Cause of the alarm Corrective measures The minimum position was In potmeter adjustment mode. 3) 20-7 APOLLO . Each time the equipment is turned on the data in the Eeprom are compared by the RAM with the previous data through the checksum. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. an attempt is made to store the maximum value of one not stored. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 311. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. without adjusting the minimum first. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. You are recommended to change the Eeprom that could be defective. If they do not correspond. The RAM has detected a non-intentional change of the data in the EEprom. During the movement. it means the data in the Eeprom could be damaged. The movement of the main beam is an axle controlled by PDI logic. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. the scan has accumulated a position error above the one set in cell 329. the angulation has accumulated a position error above the one set in the cell 311. The movement of the scan is an axle controlled by PDI logic. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 329. of the collimator potmeters (width. height or iris). The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. (Rev. The movement of the angulation is an axle controlled by PDI logic. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A5 or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A6 or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. 90 91 Angulation movement over max error 92 Scan movement over max error 93 Main beam movement over max error During the movement. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 346. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. During the movement.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 89 Diagnosis The minimum has not been adjusted. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A5 or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding.

Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 346. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control inverter A6 or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. 3) . The movement of the shutters is an axle controlled by PDI logic. the left belt has accumulated a position error above the one set in cell 375. the right belt has accumulated a position error above the one set in cell 375. the middle beam has accumulated an error position over the one set in cell 346. The right cassette belt movement is an axle controlled by PDI logic. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. 95 Shutters movement over max error 96 Right cassette belt movement over max error During the movement. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in the cell 363. During the movement. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 375. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. Corrective measures The movement of the middle beam is an axle controlled by PDI logic. APOLLO 20-8 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 94 Diagnosis Middle beam movement over max error Cause of the alarm During the movement. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 375. The left cassette belt movement is an axle controlled by PDI logic. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault in the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. the shutters have accumulated a position error above the one set in cell 363. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. 97 Left cassette belt movement over max error During the movement. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed.

the cross subdivision has accumulated a position error above the one set in cell 399. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. 3) 20-9 APOLLO . This can be caused by the movement that. (Rev. The input X18-1 (input PCB) refers to 0 V when the inverters are in the proper working conditions. 102 Angulation potmeter over max The value detected for the angulation potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom. Corrective measures The sideway cassette movement by cross subdivision is an axle controlled by PDI logic. If the current value of the angulation potmeter is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450. the series circuit dependent on the above mentioned input is deactivated.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 98 Diagnosis Cross subdivision movement over max error Cause of the alarm During the movement. because of a fault. The cause of the fault must be verified and removed or the inverter replaced if the fault cannot be repaired. therefore access X18-1 is deactivated. the alarm is generated. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the converter input to be measured on the connector X20-4 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. the alarm is generated. Exceeding this tolerance might be caused by a fault of the axle control hardware circuit or by a partial or total seizing up of the mechanical sliding. 99 Inverter fault One or both inverters are in a warning status. This can be caused by the movement that. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If there is a fault in one of the 2 inverters. 101 Angulation potmeter under The value detected for the min angulation potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom. The cause of the mechanical hardening must be removed. because of a fault. The real trajectory must therefore follow the theoretical one. Increasing the value set in the cell is not the solution to the problem. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the converter input to be measured on the connector X20-4 of the input PCB. An advance or delay tolerance of the real position is admitted but within a limit set in cell 399. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. If the current value of the angulation potmeter is over the maximum plus the value set in cell 450.

105 Main beam potmeter under The value detected for the min main beam potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom. 106 Main beam potmeter over max The value detected for the potmeter of the main beam is above that stored in Eeprom. This can be caused by the movement that.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 103 Diagnosis Scan potmeter under min Cause of the alarm The value detected for the scan potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom. because of a fault. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-5 of the input PCB. Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. because of a fault. 104 Scan potmeter over max The value detected for the scan potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom. because of a fault. the alarm is generated. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. This can be caused by the movement that. If the current value of the potmeter of the main beam is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450. 3) . has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-2 of the input PCB. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-2 of the input PCB. because of a fault. APOLLO 20-10 (Rev. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. the alarm is generated. the alarm is generated. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-5 of the input PCB. This can be caused by the movement that. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. If the current value of the potmeter of the main beam is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450. If the current value of the scan potmeter is over the maximum plus the value set in cell 450. the alarm is generated. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the scan potmeter is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450. This can be caused by the movement that. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit.

The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. the alarm is generated. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-3 of the input PCB. the alarm is generated. If the current value of the potmeter of the tabletop is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450. the alarm is generated. because of a fault. This can be caused by the movement that. This can be caused by the movement that. 111 Transversal tabletop potmeter under min The value detected for the tabletop potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-3 of the input PCB. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. the alarm is generated. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-7 of the input PCB. (Rev. Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-7 of the input PCB. If the current value of the middle beam potmeter is lower than the minimum less the value set in cell 450. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 107 Diagnosis Middle beam potmeter under min Cause of the alarm The value detected for the middle beam potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom. 112 Transversal tabletop potmeter over max The value detected for the tabletop potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom. because of a fault. because of a fault. If the current value of the potmeter of the tabletop is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450. If the current value of the potmeter of the middle beam is over the maximum plus the value set in cell 450. 108 Middle beam potmeter over The value detected for the max potmeter of the main beam is above that stored in Eeprom. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. This can be caused by the movement that. 3) 20-11 APOLLO . This can be caused by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit because of the break in the power supply potmeter circuit.

because of a fault. the alarm is generated. the alarm is generated. Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the width collimator axle potmeter is lower than the minimum less the value set in cell 450. the alarm is generated. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. 117 Width collimator potmeter under min The value detected for the width collimator potmeter is less than the one stored in EEprom. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. This can be caused by the movement that. because of a fault. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-6 of the input PCB. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. This can be caused by the movement that. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X21-1 of the input PCB. 114 SID potmeter over max The value detected for the SID potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the SID is lower than the minimum less the value set in cell 450. the alarm is generated. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X21-1 of the input PCB.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 113 Diagnosis SID potmeter under min Cause of the alarm The value detected for the SID potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter of the SID is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450. If the current value of the width collimator axle potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. 3) . This can be caused by the movement that. This can be caused by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply potmeter circuit. 118 Width collimator potmeter over max The value detected for the width collimator potmeter is above that stored in EEprom. APOLLO 20-12 (Rev. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. because of a fault. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-6 of the input PCB.

If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450. (Rev. If the current value of the height collimator axle potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450. because of a fault. This can be caused by the movement that. This can be caused by the movement that. 121 Iris collimator potmeter under min The value detected for the potmeter of the iris collimator is less than that stored in EEprom.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 119 Diagnosis Height collimator potmeter under min Cause of the alarm The value detected for the potmeter of the height collimator is less than the one stored in EEprom. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X21-3 of the input PCB. because of a fault. This can be caused by the movement that. because of a fault. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. the alarm is generated. 120 Height collimator potmeter over max The value detected for the potmeter of the collimator height is above that stored in EEprom. the alarm is generated. the alarm is generated. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X21-2 of the input PCB. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. 3) 20-13 APOLLO . Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X21-2 of the input PCB. Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is lower than the minimum less the value set in cell 450.

has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. 123 Compression force potmeter under min The value detected for the compressor potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-3 of the input PCB. Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. This can be caused by the movement that. APOLLO 20-14 (Rev. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-1 of the input PCB. If the current value of the compression force potmeter is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450. 124 Compression force potmeter over max The value detected for the compressor potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom. If the current value of the potmeter grid is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the compression force potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. This can be caused by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply potmeter circuit. because of a fault. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. 125 Grid potmeter under min The value detected for the grid potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X20-1 of the input PCB. the alarm is generated. because of a fault. This can be caused by the movement that. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X21-3 of the input PCB. If the current value of the iris collimator axle potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 122 Diagnosis Iris collimator potmeter over max Cause of the alarm The value detected for the potmeter of the iris collimator is above that stored in EEprom. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. the alarm is generated. 3) . the alarm is generated. the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the breakage of the circuit of the power supply potmeter.

(Rev. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. If the current value of the cross subdivision is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-4 of the input PCB. the alarm is generated. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. This can be caused by the movement that. 127 Gripping potmeter under min The value detected for the gripping potmeter is below that stored in EEprom. This can be caused by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply potmeter circuit. the alarm is generated. 128 Gripping potmeter over max The value detected for the potmeter of the gripping is above that stored in EEprom. If the current value of the grid potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 126 Diagnosis Grid potmeter over max Cause of the alarm The value detected for the grid potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom. the alarm is generated. This can be caused by the movement that. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-2 of the input PCB. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-3 of the input PCB. because of a fault. Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the gripping potmeter is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. If the current value of the gripping movement potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450. because of a fault. the alarm is generated. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. This can be caused by the movement that. 129 Cross subdivision potmeter The value detected for the under min cross subdivision potmeter is below that stored in EEprom. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-2 of the input PCB. because of a fault. 3) 20-15 APOLLO .

has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-4 of the input PCB. because of a fault. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault. If the current value of the shutter potmeter is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450. 132 Shutters potmeter over max The value detected for the shutters potmeter is above that stored in Eeprom. This can be caused by the movement that because of a fault has exceeded the SW limit or by the breakage of the power supply potmeter circuit. for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom. the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This can be caused by the movement that. because of a fault. APOLLO 20-16 (Rev. If the current value of the cross subdivision movement is over maximum plus the value set in cell 450. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-1 of the input PCB. Cross subdivision potmeter The value detected for the over max cross subdivision potmeter is above that stored in EEprom. the alarm is generated. If the current value of the shutters potmeter is lower than the minimum minus the value set in cell 450. This can be caused by the movement that. the alarm is generated. 3) . 131 Shutters potmeter under min The value detected for the shutters potmeter is below that stored in Eeprom. has exceeded SW limit or by the break in the potmeter power supply circuit. the alarm is generated. 133 The angulation potmeter max is lower than min An angulation potmeter max under the min was stored. Check the presence of the power supply voltage at the ends of the potmeter (5 V) and the reference voltage at the input of the converter to be measured on connector X19-1 of the input PCB.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 130 Diagnosis Cause of the alarm Corrective measures The adjustment of the minimum and maximum values of the potmeters are stored in the Eeprom.

for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault. for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. min The SID potmeter max is lower than min A SID potmeter max under the min was stored. the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. 3) 20-17 APOLLO . the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault. the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. (Rev. Corrective measures This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault. 135 The main beam potmeter max is lower than min A main beam potmeter max under the min was stored. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault. for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. 139 141 The max of the width collimator potmeter is less than the min A width collimator potmeter max value under the min was stored. A middle beam potmeter max under the min was stored. for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 134 Diagnosis The scan potmeter max is lower than min Cause of the alarm A scan potmeter max under the min was stored. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault. 136 The middle beam potmeter max is lower than min 138 The transversal tabletop A tabletop potmeter max potmeter max is lower than under the min was stored. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault.

SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 142 Diagnosis The max of the iris collimator potmeter is lower than the min The max of the iris collimator potmeter is lower than the min The max of the compression force potmeter is lower than the min The grid potmeter max is lower than min Cause of the alarm A height collimator potmeter max value under the min was stored. for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault. the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. The cross subdivision A cross subdivision potmeter max is lower than potmeter max under the min min was stored. for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. because of an operating error or fault. A compressor potmeter max under the min was stored. Corrective measures This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault. the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. An iris collimator potmeter max value under the min was stored. for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. 143 144 145 A grid potmeter max under This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when the min was stored. for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault. 147 APOLLO 20-18 (Rev. 3) . the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault. This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault. 146 The gripping potmeter max A gripping potmeter max is lower than min value under the min was stored.

the value stored corresponding to the maximum has a value which is equal to or lower than the value stored in the minimum position. Corrective measures This alarm can only cut in in the potmeters adjustment procedure and occurs when because of an operating error or fault. 156 Serial line: timeout from Supervis.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 148 Diagnosis The shutter potmeter max is lower than min Cause of the alarm A shutter potmeter max under the min was stored.3 secs. If the serial dialogue is interrupted. The main processor and the supervisor are connected to each other parallely and in series. This interruption is interrupted on the line: • supervisor RX • main TX. therefore access X13-24 is not at 0 V when the table is powered on. The Single Fault circuit is not closed. Furthermore there are jumpers where optional components could be connected. If the serial dialogue is interrupted. The SF circuit is a series obtained from the modules which the commands are on. 3) 20-19 APOLLO . 157 Serial line: timeout from Main µP to supervisor The data does not arrive on the serial line from the main µP to the supervisor for longer than 0. This interruption is interrupted on the line: • supervisor TX • main RX. this might be caused by a fault in one of the 2 processors or by the lack of a 5 V power supply to the main processor (led H1 CPU PCB) or the supervisor (led H2 CPU PCB). for which the potmeter does not move or the digital analogue converter is broken. this might be caused by a fault in one of the 2 processors or by the lack of a 5 V power supply to the main processor (led H1 CPU PCB) or the supervisor (led H2 CPU PCB). to Main µP The data does not arrive on the serial line from the supervisor to the main µP for longer than 0. (Rev.with X42-5 (closure jumper) • table-mounted control: X16-23 with X16-24 (series keys) • general terminal block: X0-25 with X0-24 (closure jumper).3 secs. Measure the continuity of the various modules as follows with the table off: • control desk: X8-12 with X41-7 (series joystick) • pedal command: X41-7 with X41-5 (series X-ray commands) • optional command: X42. The main processor and the supervisor are connected to each other parallely and in series. 158 Single Fault open at switch on.

On the parallel SID on command line (Diode V7 CPU PCB) there is not however an activation signal. or by a HW fault on the parallel line dependent on a V7. the control desk joystick (to be checked directly on the buttons on the c. The supervisor recognises that the SF is open and it receives confirmation of the SID on movement activation on the serial line. a check is carried out on the level of all the inputs button are active when the relative to the commands present on the control desk and the table-mounted table is powered up. The cause of the fault might be due to a defect on the serial line by one of the processors. in addition to that of the SF is open. It must be remembered that. 3) . The cause of the fault might be due to a defect on the serial line by one of the processors. too. to confirm the first hypothesis there must also be a fault on the SF line that is open. probably active as the SF The parallel line involved is however the one for the SID down command and the reference circuit is dependent on diode V8 (CPU PCB). The state of the table-mounted control keys (PCB A8). If one of these keys or joystick is detected as active. The main and supervisor process are connected in series and parallely. The main and supervisor process are connected in series and parallely. but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation. but the output port is not active.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 159 Diagnosis Inputs close at switch on Cause of the alarm Corrective measures A joystick or double control When the table is powered up. sent by the main processor is not present.s. Single fault open SID up=0 The supervisor detects the / serial bit 0=1 open SF and the serial confirmation that the SID lift control is active. then an alarm is present. This could be caused by the incorrect activation of a control during the powering up procedure or by a faulty command. but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation. The supervisor receives on the parallel SID on command line (diode V7 CPU PCB) the activation signal. It must be remembered that. to confirm the second hypothesis there must also be a fault on the SF line that is open. Single fault open SID down =1 / serial bit 1=0 161 162 The SID control down is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case. or by a HW fault on the parallel line dependent on a V7. APOLLO 20-20 (Rev. command. of the X-ray commands (pedal and any button pad). Nevertheless. the serial confirmation of the movement.) and the soft-touch keys of the control desk on the connector X44. is open and the output port is active. 160 Single fault open SID up=1 The SID lift control is / serial bit 0=0 probably active when the SF is open and the output port is active.

165 Single fault open tabletop in=0 / serial bit 2=1 166 Single fault open tabletop out=1 / serial bit 3=0 The tabletop out control is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case. too. but the output port is not active. too. but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 163 Diagnosis Single fault open SID down =0 / serial bit 1=1 Cause of the alarm The supervisor detects the open SF and the serial confirmation that the SID down control is active. but the output port is not active. is open and the output port is active. 3) 20-21 APOLLO . probably active as the SF The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop in command and the is open and the output reference circuit is dependent on diode V9 (CPU PCB). (Rev. What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case. too. but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation. port is active. too. The parallel line involved is however the one for the SID down command and the reference circuit is dependent on diode V8 (CPU PCB). The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop in command and the reference circuit is dependent on diode V9 (CPU PCB). The supervisor detects the open SF and the serial confirmation that the tabletop in control is active. 164 Single fault open tabletop in=1 / serial bit 2=0 The tabletop in control is What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case. The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop out command and the probably active as the SF reference circuit is dependent on diode V10 (CPU PCB). Corrective measures What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case.

is probably active when the The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor up command and the SF is open and the output reference circuit is dependent on diode V11 (CPU PCB). The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor up command and the reference circuit is dependent on diode V11 (CPU PCB). 169 Single fault open compressor up=0 / serial bit 4=1 170 Single fault open compressor down =1 / serial bit 5=0 What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case. but the output port is not active.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 167 Diagnosis Single fault open tabletop out=0 / serial bit 3=1 Cause of the alarm The supervisor detects the open SF and the serial confirmation that the tabletop out control is active. when the SF is open and the output port is active. What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case. but the output port is not active. port is active. The parallel line involved is however the one for the tabletop out command and the reference circuit is dependent on diode V10 (CPU PCB). too. but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation. too. APOLLO 20-22 (Rev. The compressor down The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor down command and control is probably active the reference circuit is dependent on diode V12 (CPU PCB). 168 Single fault open compressor up=1 / serial bit 4=0 The compressor lift control What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case. Corrective measures What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case. The supervisor detects the open SF and the serial confirmation that the compressor lift control is active. but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation. 3) . too. too.

The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A5 (main beamangulation) movement control and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB). too. but the output port is not active. Single fault open A6 The A6 inverter enabling inverter enable=1/serial bit control is probably active 7=0 when the SF is open and the output port is active. 172 Single fault open A5 The A5 inverter enabling inverter enable=1/serial bit control is probably active 6=0 when the SF is open and the output port is active. What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case. The parallel line involved is however the one for the compressor down command and open SF and the serial the reference circuit is dependent on diode V12 (CPU PCB). Single fault open A5 The supervisor detects the inverter enable=0/serial bit open SF and the serial 6=1 confirmation that the A5 inverter enabling control is active. too. 3) 20-23 APOLLO . but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation. too. but the supervisor does not receive the serial confirmation of the control activation. confirmation that the compressor down control is active. 173 What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case. too. (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 171 Diagnosis Single fault open compressor down =0 / serial bit 5=1 Cause of the alarm Corrective measures The supervisor detects the What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case. but the output port is not active. The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A5 (main beamangulation) movement control and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB). 174 What was said for alarm 160 applies in this case. The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A6 movement (middle beam-scan) movement and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V14 (forwards) and V16 (backwards) (CPU PCB).

Single fault open A5 The supervisor detects the inverter enable=0/serial bit open SF and the serial 7=1 confirmation that the A6 inverter enabling control is active. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. The movement activation circuit dependent on the diode V8 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. The movement activation circuit dependent on the diode V10 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the compressor lift control output port is active. but the output port is not active. The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the SID down control output port is active. There is HW disagreement regarding the tabletop out command. Single fault close / SID up=1 The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the SID lift control output port is active. The movement activation circuit dependent on the diode V11 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. There is HW disagreement regarding the SID down command. 180 There is HW disagreement regarding the SID up command. The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the compressor down control output port is active. The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the tabletop out control output is active. The movement activation circuit dependent on the diode V9 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. There is HW disagreement regarding the compressor down command. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the tabletop control output port is active. too. The parallel line involved is however the one for the inverter A6 movement (middle beam-scan) movement and the reference circuit is dependent on diodes V14 (forwards) and V16 (backwards) (CPU PCB). The movement activation circuit dependent on the diode V12 (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. There is HW disagreement regarding the compressor up command. The movement activation circuit dependent on the diode V7 (Cupboard ) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. There is HW disagreement regarding the tabletop in command. 181 Single fault closed / SID down=1 182 Single fault close / tabletop in=1 183 Single fault close / tabletop out=1 184 Single fault close / compressor up=1 185 Single fault closed / compressor down=1 APOLLO 20-24 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 175 Diagnosis Cause of the alarm Corrective measures What was said for alarm 161 applies in this case. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. 3) .

The movement activation circuit dependent on a diodes V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed.3. 3) 20-25 APOLLO . A check must be made to see which of the circuits the fault is on. There is a HW disagreement regarding the forward or back command of the A6 inverter (middle beam – scan). ref.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 186 Diagnosis Single fault close / A5 inverter enable =1 Cause of the alarm The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the A5 inverter enabling command output port is active. Corrective measures There is a HW disagreement regarding the forward or back command of the A5 inverter (main beam – angulation).5. the alarm is generated. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. 187 Single fault close / A6 inverter enable=1 191 The angulation potmeter does not move with active control (Rev. A check must be made to see which of the two circuits the fault is on. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time. The movement activation circuit dependent on diodes V13 (forwards) and V15 (back) (CPU PCB) is active but the SF series circuit is closed. The angulation control is active but potmeter feedback does not detect the motion. The time and value applied in the formula are set in cells 671 and 672. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11. The SF circuit is not active (closed) but the A6 inverter enabling command output port is active. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. The cause of the alarm might be: • mechanical hardening of the movement • potmeter slip • values of the cells 671 and 672 insufficient. The main processor activates the angulation movement control and at the same time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds applied.

The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 673 and 674. ref.5. ref. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 675 and 676. the alarm is generated. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time. APOLLO 20-26 (Rev. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11. The main processor activates the main beam movement command and at the same time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds applied. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertial.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 192 Diagnosis The scan potmeter does not move with active control Cause of the alarm The scan movement control is active but the potmeter feedback does not detect the motion. the alarm is generated.3. 193 The main beam potmeter does not move with active control The main beam movement control is active but the potmeter feedback does not detect the motion.5. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11. Corrective measures The main processor activates the scan movement command and at the same time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds applied. 3) . When the difference between the applied speed (Sp.3. The cause of the alarm might be: • mechanical hardening of the movement • potmeter slip • values of the cells 675 and 676 insufficient. The cause of the alarm might be: • mechanical hardening of the movement • potmeter slip • values of the cells 673 and 674 insufficient.

3. The shutters movement control is active but the potmeter feedback does not detect the motion. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time. 3) 20-27 APOLLO . 195 The shutter potmeter does not move with active control. The alarm generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is applied as per paragraph 11. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 679 and 680. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.5. the alarm is generated. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 675 and 676. The cause of the alarm might be: • mechanical hardening of the movement • potmeter slip • values of the cells 675 and 676 insufficient. the alarm is generated. Cause of the alarm The middle beam movement control is active but the potmeter feedback does not detect the motion.5. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time.3. The main processor activates the shutter movement output and at the same time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speed applied. This phenomenon is more evident in the first stages of motion because of mechanical inertia. ref. (Rev. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. ref. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. Corrective measures The main processor activates the middle beam movement output and at the same time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speeds applied. The cause of the alarm might be: • mechanical hardening of the movement • potmeter slip • values of the cells 679 and 680 insufficient.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 194 Diagnosis The middle beam potmeter does not move with active control. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp.

at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11. The cause of the alarm might be: • mechanical hardening of the movement • encoder slip • values of the cells 681 and 682 insufficient. 3) . at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time. The cause of the alarm might be: • mechanical hardening of the movement • encoder slip • values of the cells 681 and 682 insufficient.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 196 Diagnosis Right belt cassette encoder does not move with active control Cause of the alarm The R cassette movement belt is active but the motion is not detected through the encoder feedback. APOLLO 20-28 (Rev. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. ref.5. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 681 and 682. The main processor activates the L cassette movement belt output and at the same time checks that the relative encoder is sending a feedback signal that is proportional to the applied speed. the alarm is generated. 197 Left belt cassette encoder does not move with active control The L cassette movement belt is active but the motion is not detected through the encoder feedback. the alarm is generated. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia.5. The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.3. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. Corrective measures The main processor activates the R cassette movement belt output and at the same time checks that the relative encoder is sending a feedback signal that is proportional to the applied speeds.3. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 681 and 682. ref. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp.

(Rev. at the start up) and the speed detected (potmeter feedback) exceed a value obtained from a formula for a certain time. the alarm is generated. 3) 20-29 APOLLO . The alarm is generated when no movement is detected or the speed is not aligned with what is described in paragraph 11.5. the reference signal pull up "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. ref. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged. The cause might be because: • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) • excessive noise on the potmeter signal • break in the electric potmeter circuit. When the difference between the applied speed (Sp. Corrective measures The main processor activates the cross subdivision movement output and at the same time checks the relative potmeter is sending feedback signals in proportion to the speed applied. This phenomenon is more evident in the first moments of the motion because of mechanical inertia. The cause of the alarm might be: • mechanical hardening of the movement • potmeter slip • values of the cells 685 and 686 insufficient. The main processor did not activate the angulation movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 452. Thus since the circuit is broken. the alarm is generated when the table is turned on.3.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 198 Diagnosis The cross subdivision potmeter does not move with active control. 201 Angulation potmeter in movement without request There is no angulation movement control but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback. The time and the value applied in the formula are set in cells 685 and 686. Cause of the alarm The cross subdivision movement control is active but the potmeter feedback does not detect the motion.

204 Middle beam potmeter in movement without request There is no middle beam movement output but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback. the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Thus since the circuit is broken. 203 Main beam potmeter in movement without request There has been no main beam movement output but motion is detected by the potmeter feedback. APOLLO 20-30 (Rev. the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. If the electrical circuit of the potmeter is damaged. the reference signal pull up "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged. The cause might be because: • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) • excessive noise on the potmeter signal • break in the electric potmeter connection circuit. The main processor did not activate the main beam movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 454. Thus since the circuit is broken. 3) . The cause might be because: • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) • excessive noise on the potmeter signal • break in the electric potmeter circuit. the reference signal pull up "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. If the electrical circuit of the potmeter is damaged. Thus since the circuit is broken. the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. The main processor did not activate the middle beam movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 455. The cause might be because: • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) • excessive noise on the potmeter signal • break in the potmeter circuit. Corrective measures The main processor did not activate the scan movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 453.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 202 Diagnosis Scan potmeter in movement without request Cause of the alarm There has been no scan movement output but motion has been detected by the potmeter feedback. the reference signal pull up "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up.

Thus as the circuit is broken. the reference pull up signal "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. The main processor did not activate the SID movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 457. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged. Corrective measures The main processor did not activate the tabletop movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 456. (Rev. the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. The cause might be because: • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) • excessive noise on the potmeter signal • break in the electric potmeter circuit. it is seen that there has been a movement greater than the dead band (cell 226). the pull up of the reference "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged. the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. 3) 20-31 APOLLO . Thus since the circuit is broken. the reference pull up signal "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. The cause might be because: • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) • excessive noise on the potmeter signal • break in the electric potmeter connection circuit. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged. through the potmeter feedback. The compressor is in park but. The cause might have been a contact of the compression device with an obstacle or by the break in the electric potmeter circuit. Thus since the circuit is broken. 207 SID potmeter in movement without request There is no SID movement output but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 206 Diagnosis Transversal tabletop potmeter in movement without request Cause of the alarm There is no tabletop movement output but motion is detected by the potmeter feedback. 212 Compression force potmeter in movement without request There is no compression control but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback. the alarm is generated when the table is turned on.

The main processor did not activate the cross subdivision movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 449. the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. The cause might be because: • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) • excessive noise on the potmeter signal • break in the potmeter circuit. the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Corrective measures The main processor did not activate the grid movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 449. 215 Cross subdivision potmeter There is no cross in movement without subdivision movement request control but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback. the pull up of the reference "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. The cause might be because: • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) • excessive noise on the potmeter signal • break in the electrical potmeter connection circuit.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 213 Diagnosis Grid potmeter in movement without request Cause of the alarm There is no grid movement output but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback. The main processor has not activated the gripping movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 449. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged. the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. 3) . the pull up of the reference "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged. The cause might be because: • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) • excessive noise on the potmeter signal • break in the electric potmeter connection circuit. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged. Thus as the circuit is broken. Thus as the circuit is broken. the pull up of the reference "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. APOLLO 20-32 (Rev. Thus as the circuit is broken. 214 Gripping potmeter in movement without request There is no gripping movement control but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback.

The movement of the SID is not axle controlled but is an ON-OFF movement. The speed check is carried out on the basis of a mean reference value inserted in cell 236.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 216 Diagnosis Shutter potmeter in movement without request Cause of the alarm There is no shutter movement output but motion is detected through the potmeter feedback. the alarm is generated when the table is turned on. Corrective measures The main processor did not activate the shutter movement but has detected through the potmeter feedback that there has been a movement greater than what was inserted in cell 449. 226 Compressor down output active without feedback input No compressor movement feedback present when down control is active. The maximum value the error can reach is inserted in cell 447. 220 SID movement over max error The SID movement exceeded the error value set in cell 448. an error is accumulated during the movement. The movement of the tabletop is not axle controlled but is an ON-OFF movement. If the electrical potmeter circuit is damaged. the pull up of the reference "moves" the input as soon as it is powered up. As it is therefore a mean that does not take working conditions into account. 218 Transversal tabletop movement over max error The transversal tabletop movement exceeded the error value set in cell 447. an error is accumulated during the movement. The alarm can be caused by: • a mechanical slipping of the potmeter • a mechanical hardening of the movement • a motor power supply voltage with a tolerance 10% higher than the rated voltage. The cause might be because: • motion activation circuit HW fault (movement active without command by the processor) • excessive noise on the potmeter signal • break in the electric potmeter connection circuit. The maximum value the error can reach is inserted in cell 448. 3) 20-33 APOLLO . (Rev. The alarm can be caused by: • a mechanical slipping of the potmeter • a mechanical hardening of the movement • a motor power supply voltage with a tolerance 10% higher than the rated voltage. The processor activates the compressor down output but the HW confirmation that the compressor is in motion (input X32-1 input PCB active 0 V) is not there. Thus as the circuit is broken. As it is therefore a mean that does not take working conditions into account. The speed check is carried out on the basis of a mean reference value inserted in cell 235.

Compressor outputs not The compressor movement active with feedback active. If this limit is exceeded. The exceeding of this limit might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one of the components (M5 motor. U1 optoisolator). The R cassette belt movement control circuit is protected with a HW current limitation circuit (R8 resistor activation PCB). belt motor movement exceeded maximum current threshold. the optoisolator U1 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 18 (CPU PCB). SF circuit is open but no movement control is recognised. while there is a request for movement or X-ray emission. That might be caused by a fault in a command key on the panel mounted on the table or by a joystick on the control desk which do not correctly switch the SF circuit and the input closure.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 227 Diagnosis Cause of the alarm Corrective measures The processor has not activated the compressor lift or descent but the input X32-1 input PCB is active at 0 V. 228 231 232 Single Fault close with active inputs One or more movement controls present but SF circuit is not active (closed). 240 Right cass. feedback is active without movement commands. Right cass. while there is a request for movement or X-ray emission. This alarm is generated if the SF circuit is not open within the time set in cell 451. belt movement overcurrent APOLLO 20-34 (Rev. 3) . D1 driver. Compressor up output active without feedback input Single Fault open without active inputs No compressor movement feedback present when lift control is active. Check the continuity of the various modules crossed by the SF series circuit: • command desk: X8-12 with X41-7 (series joystick) • pedal command: X41-7 with X41-5 (series X-ray commands) • optional command: X42-7 with X42-5 (closure jumper) • table-mounted control: X16-23 with X16-24 (series keys) • general terminal block: X0-25 with X0-24 (closure jumper). Another reason for the alarm might be due to the opening of the SF circuit (input X1324 input PCB). This alarm is generated if the SF circuit is not open within the time set in cell 451. The processor activates the compressor lift output but the HW confirmation that the compressor is in motion (input X32-1 input PCB active 0 V) is not there. That might be caused by a fault in a command key on the panel mounted on the table or by a joystick on the control desk which do not correctly switch the SF circuit and the input closure.

U3 optoisolator). check the cassette input presser. The cassette did not reach the format recognition photocell within 1 sec. the state of the cassette. Corrective measures The L cassette belt movement control circuit is protected with a HW current limitation circuit (R8 resistor activation PCB). If the cause is the latter. The alarm might be caused by a fault of the format reading photocell circuit or by the cassette moving too slowly. the optoisolator U2 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 17 (CPU PCB). The gripping opening/grid parking has a time out of 8 secs. D2 driver. 3) 20-35 APOLLO . driver D7). The exceeding of this limit might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one of the components (M10 motor. • dead band too small (cell 227) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point • break in the movement circuit (engine M7. the gripping pressure and the state of the belts driving the cassette.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 241 Diagnosis Left cass. D5 and D6 drivers. fuse F23. the processor wants to recognise the activation of the size reading photocell input (X14-2 input PCB) active within 1 sec. U4 optoisolator). The exceeding of this limit might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one of the components (M6 motor. If the set point is not reached the cause might be: • an electrical potmeter fault or the mechanical slipping of the same. U2 optoisolator). The shutter cross subdivision movement control is protected by a HW current limitation circuit (resistor R12 activation PCB). 242 Shutters overcurrent 243 Cross subdivision overcurrent Cross subdivision movement motor exceeded maximum current threshold. (Rev. If this limit is exceeded. the optoisolator U4 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 16 (CPU PCB). D3 and D4 drivers. Shutters movement motor exceeded maximum current threshold. The exceeding of this limit might be caused by a mechanical hardening of the movement or by an electrical fault on one of the components (M8 motor. the optoisolator U3 sends 0 V to the integrated circuit D26 pin 15 (CPU PCB). The cross subdivision movement control is protected by a HW current limitation circuit (resistor R12 activation PCB). If this limit is exceeded. When the cassette transport command is activated. belt movement overcurrent Cause of the alarm Left cass. 300 Cassette loading error 301 Grid movement timeout The grid did not reach the destination (parking or position 0) within 8 secs. belt motor movement exceeded maximum current threshold.. If this limit is exceeded.

caused by a fault of the photosensor circuit or by the excessively slow movement of the cassette.I. lift down movement is activated the input X15-5 run) within 3 secs (switch S29) must be deactivated within 3 secs. relay K10 and K11 output PCB). The alarm might be 5 secs. 3) . the state of the cassette. The opening and gripping commands direct to the driver D8 (activation PCB) to pins 5 and 7 have been sent simultaneously.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 302 Diagnosis Gripping movement timeout Cause of the alarm The gripping did not reach destination (cassette opening or closing) within 5 secs. The SW controlled the gripping open / close control drivers simultaneously.I. 303 Cassette size photosensor not released Cassette size photosensor The cassette presence photosensor (input X14-1 input PCB) must be deactivated is obscured for longer than within 5 sec of the cassette insertion command being activated. driver D8).I. If the set point is not reached the cause might be: • electrical potmeter fault or mechanical slipping of the same (only for the opening) • gripping switch fault (S33 with input X14-4 input PCB) (only for the closure) • dead band too small (cell 228) cause of repeated oscillations at the set point (only for the opening) • break in the movement circuit (engine M9. check the cassette input presser. The non arrival of the movement at destination might be caused by a mechanical movement failure or an electronic fault of one of the circuit components (switch S28 or 29. If the cause is the latter. APOLLO 20-36 (Rev. remote switch K4M and K5M. When I. fuse F22. lift movement timeout The I. This causes a short circuit that damages the components. The circuits dependent on integrated D6 pin 11 and 12 output PCB should be checked. 304 Simultaneous drivers enable 305 I. Corrective measures The gripping opening/closure movement has a time out of 5 secs.I. lift did not reach When the I. the gripping pressure and the state of the belts driving the cassette. motor M12. lift up movement is activated the input X15-4 (switch S28) must be destination (up / down end deactivated within 3 secs.

Replace the Eeprom. A functioning failure detected on Eeprom. Failure to reach these set points within 5 secs. Repeat the operation or replace the Ram. it is probably defective.I. In copying Eeprom (cell 702) the writing is not complete. lift is called. table is powered up. (Rev. Check that the control desk keys. The comparison of the data was wrong during Eeprom copying (cell 702). 500 RAM-EEPROM: data missing RAM-EEPROM: writing timeout RAM-EEPROM: failed verification RAM-EEPROM: wrong Eeprom reading. It was not possible to transfer data to Eeprom. the shutters must reach the corresponding position to the min potmeter adjustment and the subdivision movement in a cross must reach the centre. Data in Eeprom are compared with that in the Ram when the equipment is powered up. Data in Eeprom cannot be read. 501 502 503 907 Button or joystick active at A joystick or double control A key is pressed when the table is powered up. Replace the Eeprom. Corrective measures When the I. If the check shows that there is no correspondence between the data and the checksum the alarm is generated. it is probably defective.I. keys of the table-mounted panel and pedal have the NO contact open in the rest position. For the shutters the data of the cells 300 relative at that moment are valid. The cause might be due to an operator switch on button are active when the error (key or joystick pressed during power up) or by a defective key. 3) 20-37 APOLLO . lift due to a control error.I. activates the alarm. See the description for alarm 302 for the gripping circuits. lift call Cause of the alarm Cross subdivision or shutter movements did not reach position to allow I. This might be caused by a fault on one of the control circuits of these movements. The Eeprom or the Ram must be replaced.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 306 Diagnosis Timeout shutters or cross subdivision movement for I. Data in Eeprom are different from those in RAM. It was not possible to read the data during Eeprom copying (cell 701).

Check the ends of the battery on the CPU PCB to see that there is a voltage of 3. Change the battery if the voltage is not high enough or change the Ram if the defect persists. 3) . This might be caused by a defect in the Ram or the buffer battery with insufficient voltage. Corrective measures With page 719 active (deletion of alarm history) or a page between 853 and 867 (cycle deletion) the flash eprom is not reset. On powering up the Ram is seen to have no data. The Flash-Eprom did not allow to write data relative to history. Repeat the operation or replace the flash eprom. 962 999 APOLLO 20-38 (Rev. Check battery Cause of the alarm The Flash-Eprom was not erased to reset the warnings or cycles history. Replace the probably defective flash eprom.6 V. Data no longer in RAM. The alarm history or the updating of the table cycles is not written on the flash eprom.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Error 961 Diagnosis FLASH-EPROM erasing failed FLASH-EPROM writing failed Data lost in RAM.

an effective way for checking whether the non-movement of the compressor is due to this reason when the table is functioning normally is to increase the value of the compression force using the dedicated key until the maximum and then to activate the descent movement. check that input X0-17 is 0V. Corrective measures The tilting function is designed in such a way that the movement continues without stopping if it the I. might not manage to escape and enter the safety zone.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 20. The movements controlled with the table PDI (tilting. the tilting algorithm is modified and replaced by an anti-collision movement. Remember that if the reduction is too great the gains make the positioning inaccurate. If safety barrier devices are installed. At switch ON the message "LIMIT BARRIER" is displayed The compressor is not brought into the field. check that the value of the potmeter with pressure-free cone is equal to or less than the stored value. gets too close to the floor. If the values of the proportional. Before adjusting these parameters. access the potmeter adjustment routine and cell 123.I. connected to 0 V. 3) 20-39 APOLLO .2. Check parameters not regulated properly.2 20. (Rev.I. The data entered in cell 208 must therefore be increased. check that the devices are functional and that are not activated by elements of the table or any other object Wrong adjustment of the compression force minimum photometer. derived and integral gains are not properly regulated the movements lose their smoothness. the message "Limit reached" is often displayed". If this not the case. After checking the proper functioning of the circuit relating to the compressor unit.I. The gain values for the axle presenting the defect are modified by reducing what is set in 5% steps until movements are obtained without jerks and vibrations. read what is described in paragraph 11. does not escape the ascent band and enters the collision zone. To ensure this condition a ascent band is set (cell 208) positioned over the I.2. the I. Fault or malfunction During the tilting.I. If the band is too small.-floor height. Input X0-17 is not connected to If no safety barrier devices are installed in the room. the minimum value of the potmeter must then be adjusted.1. enters the ascent band. angulation) are not smooth. lift. When the I.I. If the movement is activated.1 Troubleshooting for faults or malfunctions not recognised by the processor Table Reason The I. scan.

4. Check that the thermomagnetic cut out Q1 is closed. the layer position is calculated by means of an algorithm that takes account of the equipment's mechanical dimensions. Check that the fuse F4 is not broken. The equipment does not come on. The tomo layer is not correct. Corrective measures The horizontal position of the table is obtained thanks to the combination of the main and middle beam positions.1. A new adjustment must be done as described in paragraph 10. The setting must be changed as described in paragraph 11. A sophisticated algorithm manages the main and middle beam movement used for the tilting and lift functions. A defect like this can be corrected by modifying the data contained in cell 438. As the tomography of the Apollo table is completely electronic.2. The geometry of some of the table's mechanical components is different. Carry out the adjustment of the main and middle beams very carefully. APOLLO 20-40 (Rev.1.4. Check the data in cells 409 and 410 that determine the stop position. The extreme positions of the table are obtained thanks to the combination of the main and middle beam positions. The vertical or Trendelembourg position of the table is not correct. as described in paragraph 10. If this switch cuts in during movements. The main and middle beam potmeters have not been adjusted properly. The main and middle beam The correspondence of the collision switch often cuts in. Carry out the adjustment of the main and middle beams very carefully. the cause might be: • main and middle beam potmeter adjustment not correct. as described in paragraph 10. main beam's position with that of the middle beam is wrong. 3) . Reason The main and middle beam potmeters have not been adjusted properly.4 • adjustment of particularly sparse PDI gains.1.1. Lack of power supply to the logical circuits. Check the presence of the single-phase voltage to the T2 transformer primary.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Fault or malfunction The horizontal position of the table is not correct. An anti-collision switch prevents a collision being generated between main and middle beam.

1. The cassette gripping closure The control circuit is defective.2. there is a collision between I. Check fuse F22 positioned on the PCB A10 on the Spot Film Device. Before adjusting these parameters. on opening.1. check the set value in cell 228 (dead band gripping opening) that could be excessive.1. If the values of the proportional. 3) 20-41 APOLLO . when the gripping devices do not lock on the cassette. lift high.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 20. If the opening should again prove to be critical. The potmeter adjustment of the Recalibrate the gripping potmeter adjustment that should have a minimum position gripping opening is wrong. with PDI of the Spot Film Device (longitudinal cassette.I. With I.2"). see paragraph 10. If it is seen to be broken check that the gripping devices do not hit the walls of the Spot Film Device violently. and shutters. transversal cassette and shutters) are not fluid. derived and integral gains are not properly regulated the movements lose their smoothness. movement is not working. lift high.12. see paragraph 10. The gain values for the axle presenting the defect are modified by reducing what is set in 5% steps until movements are obtained without jerks and vibrations.I. Fault or malfunction With I. read what is described in paragraph 11. and cassette guides. corresponding to an opening of 463 mm (18. Remember that too great a reduction of the gains makes the positioning imprecise.7").I.I.2 Spot Film Device (not available on “All Digital” version) Reason The adjustment of the shutter potmeter is wrong. (Rev. Check that pressure switch S33 is not open (input X14-4). there is a collision between I. The movements controlled Check parameters are not correctly regulated. Corrective measures Recalibrate the shutter potmeter that should have a minimum position corresponding to an opening of 475 mm (18.14.2.

230 height. the cause of this defect might be due to: A.3. of the shutters or of the collimator does not occur in the regular times. Reason The positioning of the cassette. 231 iris) must be increased.Dead band to small The axle positioning dead band is too short.2. If the defect is on the cassette or shutter movements. 3) .HW adjustment of the gain circuit is wrong The trimmers. It is therefore also possible to adjust the slowdown cells (232 width. Corrective measures The X-ray request to the generator control is sent when the cassette. The increase of this parameter does not influence the positioning precision but has. shutters and collimator reach the correct position. as its only drawback. check to see if there are mechanical obstacles or take measures on the gains as described in the paragraph 11. It must therefore be checked which of these three movements is excessively slow in reaching the set point. APOLLO 20-42 (Rev. an increase in the positioning time on the axle. 233 height. This might be caused by a degradation of the potmeter or the increase in mechanical backlashes. must be adjusted as described in the paragraph 16. by a quantity equal to the value set.1.2 and inch paragraph 4. therefore the movement cannot stop on the set point. which reduce the speed of the axle before reaching the set point.2 B. Wrong use of the cassette or defect in the size reading photosensor. The increase in this value however increases the positioning tolerance thereby diminishing the precision. It should be checked that the cassette size used is in the range allowed (see size table and cm division paragraph 4. The cassette is not recognised. The correspondence between the type of cassette used (cm or inch) and the data in cell 257 is checked. If the above is correct. R48 height or R58 iris. If the defect is on the positioning of the collimator axles. check the functioning of the size reading photosensor (input X14-2).1. The value in the cell relating to the axle with the defect (229 width.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Fault or malfunction The fluoro exposure time is long. 234 iris). R38 width.

9 iris. The grid centering is not correct. The central position of the grid is not correct. paragraphs 10. The positioning of the shutters is incorrect.4. The horizontal radiogram subdivision line (cross subdivision program) is not the required size. If the separation line has a clear border. If the white separation lines do not have a clear border.14.13. the position of the shutters needs to be changed. The shutters and the width collimator are responsible for the subdivision of the radiograms.2 must be identified.1.8 height. the Spot Film Device.1. the two numbers of the same quantity must be increased • modifying the 2 numbers of different quantities modifies the centering of the cassette. Check the adjustment of the cross subdivision potmeter paragraph 10. The fluoroscopic image shows one side darker than the other. this means that the limitation is carried out by the collimator. If this value is too big. The vertical radiogram subdivision lines are not of the size required. 10. it must be modified by changing the parameter in cell 220.1. Check the data in cells 459 and 460 and modify it remembering that: • if the separation line is too wide. The 43 cm (17") high cassette The gripping device opening is is inserted with difficulty in not big enough. the shutter potmeters adjustment must be adjusted as described in paragraph 10. Repeat the gripping device opening potmeter adjustment procedure (see paragraph 10. The transversal movement of the cassette is wrong.1.1.3.12). 3) 20-43 APOLLO . Check the value of the cell 228. 10. the cell whose parameter is to be modified among those present in the table of paragraph 11.7 width. If the error is only present on a few subdivision programs. the two numbers of the same quantity must be reduced • if the separation line is too narrow. (Rev. Check the data in cell 218 and modify it if the potmeter adjustment has not solved the problem.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Fault or malfunction Reason Corrective measures The gripping devices do not open wide enough to accommodate the cassette with the maximum height. If the error is constant over all the sizes and subdivisions. the gripping device might not be able to open wide enough. must therefore be adjusted.1. The collimator potmeters adjustment.

10. R38 width. 230 height. Check the adjustment of the collimator potmeters paragraphs 10.1. Check the data in the cells 214÷217 and modify them according to dimensions of the fields of the I. by a quantity equal to the value set.I. must be adjusted as described in the paragraph 16. R48 height or R58 iris.2.1.HW adjustment of the gain circuit is wrong The trimmers.7 width.2 B. This might be caused by a degradation of the potmeter or the increase in mechanical backlashes. 10.8 height. Check the adjustment of the collimator potmeters paragraphs 10. installed.1.7 width. It is therefore also possible to adjust the slowdown cells (232 width. 234 iris). 231 iris) must be increased.3 Collimator Reason HW adjustment wrong or reduced positioning window.9 iris. 233 height. The increase of this parameter does not influence the positioning precision but has. Corrective measures The causes of this defect may be: A.I. which reduce the speed of the axle before reaching the set point. Check the data in cell 218 and modify it if the potmeter adjustment has not solved the problem. The exposed collimation is not correct. an increase in the positioning time on the axle.SERVICE MANUAL Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 20.1. APOLLO 20-44 (Rev.Dead band to small The axle positioning dead band is too short. The fluoro collimation is not correct.9 iris. 10. 3) . as its only drawback.1.1. Fault or malfunction One or more collimator axles oscillate when achieving the set point.8 height. The value in the cell relating to the axle with the defect (229 width. 10. therefore the movement cannot stop on the set point.1. The collimator sizes do not correspond with I. The collimated sizes do not correspond with film size. The increase in this value however increases the positioning tolerance thereby diminishing the precision. fields.

G NOTE: The Service Engineer has to take special care for all what concerns electrical safety of the device and must make sure of restoring all provisions for electrical safety which may be affected during a service intervention and to solicit the customer to have the electrical safety tests repeated every time the intervention has caused the replacement of important parts or the intervention has significantly affected safety provisions of the device. the equipment must be checked and maintained regularly. cables and springs that are subject to natural wear and tear. 3) 21-1 APOLLO .2). To prevent any possibility of risk to the patient or operator. Maintenance can be carried out by the operator (paragraph 21. Apollo contains mechanical parts such as. to provide top levels of electrical safety and contain the dispersion of X-rays within the preestablished limits. This precaution ensures efficient. bearings. (Rev. long-lasting functioning.SERVICE MANUAL Maintenance and cleaning 21 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING As all electrical equipments. The electromechanical and electronic components contained in the units must be adjusted correctly to ensure they work perfectly and to give quality radiographic images. but also maintenance and checks on a regular basis. this unit requires not only a correct usage.1) or by the authorised engineer (paragraph 21.

1 Maintenance the operator can carry out The check carried out directly by the operator are the following: Frequency Daily Daily Type of check Check the working of the light indicators and LEDs located on the control desk Functioning of joysticks and buttons located on the control desk and on the panel on the side of the table Absence of contrast liquid residuals Check smooth flow and noise of movements Integrity of equipment and labels Method Visual inspection Visual inspection Visual inspection Visual inspection Visual inspection Daily Daily Monthly WARNING: The operator is recommended to carry out the controls before each working session. or failures. high noisiness of motorised components. In case of irregularities. APOLLO 21-2 (Rev. 3) . the operator must immediately notify the Technical Staff.SERVICE MANUAL Maintenance and 21.

(Rev. At the maintenance stage. WARNING: Preventive and/or corrective operations may only be carried out by Villa Sistemi Medicali authorised personnel.2 Paragraph 19. 3) 21-3 APOLLO .2 Maintenance that can be carried out by the Authorised Technician It is recommended that a technician authorised by Villa Sistemi Medicali services the equipment once a year to ensure it always stays in tip-top condition. you are recommended to adhere to the information reported in chapter 8 of the User's manual. SID Check of the state of the Spot Film Device gripping movement belts Method Visual inspection Paragraph 19.1 Visual inspection Visual inspection Chapter 6 Practical control Practical control Visual inspection Visual inspection WARNING: Only use original spare parts if components need to be replaced. the performance of the equipment is checked and if possible adjusted in line with the indications in the previous chapters as summarised in the following table: Type of check Removal of the casing and cleaning of the parts underneath with particular attention to the Spot Film Device covers X-ray beam centering check X-ray field – light field correspondence check Cassette size subdivision control Checking of the movements and operability of the control desk and the table-mounted control Checking of the tilting. WARNING: For cleaning and disinfecting operations carried out directly by the Authorised Technician.2 Paragraph 19. angulation and tabletop centering Checking of the chain voltage Check of the level of lubricant in the reduction units Check of the motor belts Check of the state of main beam bearings.SERVICE MANUAL Maintenance and cleaning 21.

SERVICE MANUAL Maintenance and THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 21-4 (Rev. 3) .

The wiring diagrams are shown with references on them detailing: Pin number Connection number (Rev. 3) 22-1 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings 22 WIRING DIAGRAMS AND DRAWINGS The connections of the cables used on the Apollo tables are made with the use of connectors.

A11 Base unit connector PCB layout 19.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings 22. A8 Table keyboard PCB layout 15. 8. A8 Table keyboard PCB wiring diagram 16. A10 Spot Film Device wiring diagram 18. 6. A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB layout 12. A10 Spot Film Device PCB layout 17. 5. 3) . A11 Base unit connector PCB wiring diagram APOLLO 22-2 (Rev. A3 Output PCB wiring diagram 11. 4. A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB wiring diagram 13.1 List of wiring diagrams and drawings 1. 7. 3. A7 Filter PCB schematic and layout 14. Interconnection diagram Power supply diagram Functional drawing Cabinet layout A1 CPU PCB layout A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram A2 Input PCB layout A2 Input PCB wiring diagram A3 Output PCB layout 10. 9. 2.

A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram 26. A15 Compressor PCB wiring diagram 28. A13 Angulation connector wiring diagram 24. A14 Control desk . A15 Compressor PCB layout 27. A16 Additional Collimator Filters PCB wiring diagram 30. A17 Table Top Control PCB layout and wiring diagram (Rev. A16 Additional Collimator Filters PCB layout 29.CPU PCB layout 25. A12 Cabinet connector PCB wiring diagram 22. 4) 22-3 APOLLO . A12 Cabinet connector PCB layout 21.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings 20. A13 Angulation connector PCB layout 23.

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 22-4 (Rev. 3) .

3) 22-5 .switches X83–R1:Main beam pot.switches X82–R10:Compressor pot.compressor motors X100–S31:L/H speed change switch CAN BUS S.103–Emergency switches X64.S.I.Main/Middle beam Emergency switch X77–S46-47:Table Top Emerg.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings D-SUB Connector ELECTRONIC CABINET X33 22V∼ 48V∼ TRDX+/TRSA+/- A2 INPUT X34 X35 X36 X37 X38 X39 X44 24V∼ A2 INPUT X16 A2 INPUT X50 – R5: Shutters pot.present sensor (Emitter) X63–B3:Cass.. X84–R3:Middle beam pot. X14 X51 – R6: Gripping pot. X18 I30…I32 A10 SFD X1 X19 I12…I17 10V∼ 10V∼ O10…O11 O18…O21 O32…O35 TPU0…TPU3 VOUTA.switches X78–S48-49:Main beam Emerg.VOUTD ORS KVA X27 APOLLO Table X74–Emergency switches circuit X76–S44-45:SID Emergency switches X79–S50-51:Angulation Emerg.present sensor (Receiver) X66–S33:Cassette gripping switch X67–Test Point X101. Left belt Device PCB X54 – M5: Cass..O. A12 X17 I12…I17 X6 INV. X92–Y1:Main beam brake X93–Y3:Middle beam brake A10 SFD X16 I39…I54 X5B OUT40…OUT71 O8. lift end-run switches X94–Y2:Angulation brake X95–Y4:Scanning brake A12 X21 I12…I17 X8 I11 I18b X23 X32 A2 INPUT X32 X22 Inverter X31 X18 A2 INPUT X69 X71 – Angulation motor X72 – Middle beam motor X73 – Scanning motor PCB Collimator X30 X70 –Main beam motor X0 X99–M11-14:SID.102.switches X81–S54-55:Middle beam Emerg.65–Anti-entrapment device (Optional . LUMN CONM X28 X48 X29 X45 28Vdc X104 X2 X20 I12…I17 A3 OUTPUT PCB X24 X107 24Vdc 18V∼ 18V∼ 36V∼ USMC U32…U35 A15 Compressor PCB X99 A13 Interconnection PCB (located on column) A11 X45 X45 O0…O1 X86–R4:Scanning pot.TPU3 A2 INPUT A2 INPUT A2 INPUT X15 X17 X4 X5A OUT0…OUT39 A12 Interconnection PCB X46 A11 Interconnection PCB (located on base) A12 X15 X21 X47 – Enable for K2-K3-K4-K5 X49 – K1L: table emergency A2 INPUT X20 X88–R11:Table Top pot.standard on C-CSA-US vers) Connector for FLAT CABLE – Screws connectors X12 LIM+/- X10 X11 X0 X13 20V∼ 18V∼ IN56…IN59 IN0…IN31 X3A A1 CPU PCB A4 Spot Film Device Motor Driver PCB (not present on “All Digital” version) X25 DC+/GR+/GN+/- A10 Spot Film X55 – M6: Cass.switches X80–S52-53:Scanning Emerg. OK1L O2…O6 O36…O59 KVA X26 X105 X0 X97 X98 X96–M13:Table Top motor. O9 IK1L. X87–R9:SID pot. 24V∼ X41 – Foot switch APOLLO Interconnection diagram 1 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO Control Desk X42 – Hand switch (Rev. X89–S25:Tube at 0° position X90–S26-27:Compres.Right belt X56 – M7: Grid motor (not present on X57 – M8: Shutters motor “All Digital” version) X58 – M9: Gripping motor X59 – M10: Cross subdivision motor Spot Film Device X75–S32:Anticoll. X52 – R7: Cross subdivision pot. X19 X68 X68 X44 A8 T.end-run switches X91–S28-29:I. X85–R2:Angulation pot. I19…I29 A10 SFD X14 I33…I37 ENC_A ENC_B +5V ENC I0…I10 IN32…IN59 ENC_A ENC_B IA0…IA15 +5V ENC Vref Pot X3B O60…O63 OUT64…OUT71 TPU0. X60–B1:Cassette Encoder X61–B4/5:Cassette size sensor X62–B2:Cass.F. PCB X53 – R8: Grid pot.

Rev. 1 2 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Power supply diagram Code 39849002 . 3) 22-7 .

Rev. 9 3 Page 1 of 19 APOLLO (Rev. 4) 22-9 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 .

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 . 4) 22-11 .Rev. 9 3 Page 2 of 19 APOLLO (Rev.

4) 22-13 .Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 . 9 3 Page 3 of 19 APOLLO (Rev.

Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 . 9 3 Page 4 of 19 APOLLO (Rev. 4) 22-15 .

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 . 4) 22-17 . 9 3 Page 5 of 19 APOLLO (Rev.Rev.

9 3 Page 6 of 19 APOLLO (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 . 4) 22-19 .Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 .Rev. 9 3 Page 7 of 19 APOLLO (Rev. 4) 22-21 .

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 . 4) 22-23 .Rev. 9 3 Page 8 of 19 APOLLO (Rev.

9 3 Page 9 of 19 APOLLO (Rev.Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 . 4) 22-25 .

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 . 9 3 Page 10 of 19 APOLLO (Rev.Rev. 4) 22-27 .

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 . 9 3 Page 11 of 19 APOLLO (Rev. 4) 22-29 .Rev.

4) 22-31 . 9 3 Page 12 of 19 APOLLO (Rev.Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 .

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 . 9 3 Page 13 of 19 APOLLO (Rev.Rev. 4) 22-33 .

Rev. 4) 22-35 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 . 9 3 Page 14 of 19 APOLLO (Rev.

9 3 Page 15 of 19 APOLLO (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 .Rev. 4) 22-37 .

Rev. 9 3 Page 16 of 19 APOLLO (Rev. 4) 22-39 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 .

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 .Rev. 9 3 Page 17 of 19 APOLLO (Rev. 4) 22-41 .

4) 22-43 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 .Rev. 9 3 Page 18 of 19 APOLLO (Rev.

9 3 Page 19 of 19 APOLLO (Rev. 4) 22-45 .Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Functional drawing Code 39849001 .

3) 4 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO 22-47 . 0 (C-CSA-US) (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO Cabinet layout Code 83848060 .Rev. 2 (CE) Code 83848250 .Rev.

6 5 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO (Rev.Rev. 4) 22-49 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A1 CPU PCB layout Code 58838150 .

Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849025 . 3) 6 Page 1 of 9 APOLLO 22-51 . 1 (Rev.

Rev. 3) 6 Page 2 of 9 APOLLO 22-53 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849025 . 1 (Rev.

3) 6 Page 3 of 9 APOLLO 22-55 . 1 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849025 .Rev.

3) 6 Page 4 of 9 APOLLO 22-57 . 1 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849025 .Rev.

3) 6 Page 5 of 9 APOLLO 22-59 .Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849025 . 1 (Rev.

Rev. 1 (Rev. 3) 6 Page 6 of 9 APOLLO 22-61 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849025 .

1 (Rev.Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849025 . 3) 6 Page 7 of 9 APOLLO 22-63 .

1 (Rev. 3) 6 Page 8 of 9 APOLLO 22-65 .Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849025 .

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings

APOLLO A1 CPU PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849025 - Rev. 1 (Rev. 3)

6
Page 9 of 9 APOLLO

22-67

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings

APOLLO A2 Input PCB layout
Code 58838152 - Rev. 2

7
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO

(Rev. 3)

22-69

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings

APOLLO A2 Input PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849027 - Rev. 4 (Rev. 3)

8
Page 1 of 4 APOLLO

22-71

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings

APOLLO A2 Input PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849027 - Rev. 4 (Rev. 3)

8
Page 2 of 4 APOLLO

22-73

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings

APOLLO A2 Input PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849027 - Rev. 4 (Rev. 3)

8
Page 3 of 4 APOLLO

22-75

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings

APOLLO A2 Input PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849027 - Rev. 4 (Rev. 3)

8
Page 4 of 4 APOLLO

22-77

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings

APOLLO A3 Output PCB layout
Code 58838154 - Rev. 0

9
Page 1 of 1 APOLLO

(Rev. 3)

22-79

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings

APOLLO A3 Output PCB wiring diagram
Code 39849029 - Rev. 3 (Rev. 4)

10
Page 1 of 8 APOLLO

22-81

4) 10 Page 2 of 8 APOLLO 22-83 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A3 Output PCB wiring diagram Code 39849029 . 3 (Rev.Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A3 Output PCB wiring diagram Code 39849029 . 3 (Rev.Rev. 4) 10 Page 3 of 8 APOLLO 22-85 .

Rev. 4) 10 Page 4 of 8 APOLLO 22-87 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A3 Output PCB wiring diagram Code 39849029 . 3 (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A3 Output PCB wiring diagram Code 39849029 . 3 (Rev.Rev. 4) 10 Page 5 of 8 APOLLO 22-89 .

3 (Rev. 4) 10 Page 6 of 8 APOLLO 22-91 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A3 Output PCB wiring diagram Code 39849029 .Rev.

3 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A3 Output PCB wiring diagram Code 39849029 . 4) 10 Page 7 of 8 APOLLO 22-93 .Rev.

Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A3 Output PCB wiring diagram Code 39849029 . 3 (Rev. 4) 10 Page 8 of 8 APOLLO 22-95 .

0 (Rev. 3) 11 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO 22-97 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB layout Code 58838156 .Rev.

0 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB wiring diagram Code 39849031 .Rev. 3) 12 Page 1 of 3 APOLLO 22-99 .

3) 22-101 .Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB wiring diagram Code 39849031 . 0 12 Page 2 of 3 APOLLO (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A4 Spot Film Device motor driver PCB wiring diagram Code 39849031 .Rev. 0 12 Page 3 of 3 APOLLO (Rev. 3) 22-103 .

Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A7 Filter PCB schematic and layout Code 58848154 . 3) 22-105 . 0 13 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO (Rev.

1 (Rev.Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A8 Table keyboard PCB layout Code 58843050 . 3) 14 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO 22-107 .

1 (Rev. 3) 15 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO 22-109 .Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A8 Table keyboard PCB wiring diagram Code 39849019 .

Rev.0 (C-CSA-US) (Rev.Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A10 Spot Film Device PCB layout Code 58833015 . 3) 16 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO 22-111 . 2 (CE) Code 58843054 .

3) 17 Page 1 of 2 APOLLO 22-113 .Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A10 Spot Film Device PCB wiring diagram Code 39849014 . 2 (Rev.

3) 17 Page 2 of 2 APOLLO 22-115 .Rev. 2 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A10 Spot Film Device PCB wiring diagram Code 39849014 .

Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A11 Base unit connector PCB layout Code 58841050 . 0 18 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO (Rev. 3) 22-117 .

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A11 Base unit connector PCB wiring diagram Code 39849010 .Rev. 0 (Rev. 3) 19 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO 22-119 .

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A12 Cabinet connector PCB layout Code 58848150 . 3) 22-121 .Rev. 0 20 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO (Rev.

Rev. 3) 21 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO 22-123 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A12 Cabinet connector PCB wiring diagram Code 39849012 . 0 (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A13 Angulation connector PCB layout Code 58843052 .Rev. 0 22 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO (Rev. 3) 22-125 .

Rev. 3) 23 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO 22-127 . 0 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A13 Angulation connector PCB wiring diagram Code 39849021 .

Rev. 4 (Rev. 4) 24 Page 1 of 2 APOLLO 22-129 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A14 Control desk – CPU PCB layout Code 58838158 .

4) 24 Page 2 of 2 APOLLO 22-131 .Rev. 4 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A14 Control desk – CPU PCB layout Code 58838158 .

Rev. 3) 25 Page 1 of 7 APOLLO 22-133 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849033 . 1 (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849033 .Rev. 3) 25 Page 2 of 7 APOLLO 22-135 . 1 (Rev.

1 (Rev. 3) 25 Page 3 of 7 APOLLO 22-137 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849033 .Rev.

Rev. 1 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849033 . 3) 25 Page 4 of 7 APOLLO 22-139 .

Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849033 . 3) 25 Page 5 of 7 APOLLO 22-141 . 1 (Rev.

1 (Rev. 3) 25 Page 6 of 7 APOLLO 22-143 .Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849033 .

3) 25 Page 7 of 7 APOLLO 22-145 . 1 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A14 Control desk CPU PCB wiring diagram Code 39849033 .Rev.

0 (Rev. 3) 26 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO 22-147 .Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A15 Compressor PCB layout Code 58848152 .

Rev. 0 (Rev. 3) 27 Page 1 of 3 APOLLO 22-149 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A15 Compressor PCB wiring diagram Code 39849016 .

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A15 Compressor PCB wiring diagram Code 39849016 . 3) 27 Page 2 of 3 APOLLO 22-151 . 0 (Rev.Rev.

3) 27 Page 3 of 3 APOLLO 22-153 .SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A15 Compressor PCB wiring diagram Code 39849016 .Rev. 0 (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A16 Additional Collimator Filtres PCB layout Code 58848156 .Rev. 4) 22-155 . 0 28 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO (Rev.

Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A16 Additional Collimator Filtres PCB wiring diagram Code 39849051 . 4) 29 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO 22-157 . 0 (Rev.

0 30 Page 1 of 1 APOLLO (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Wiring diagrams and drawings APOLLO A17 Table Top Control PCB layout and wiring diagram Code 58846140 .Rev. 4) 22-159 .

SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 23 SPARE PARTS 1 – Electrical components 2 – Electrical cabinet and PCB’s inside the table 3 – Connections cables 4 – Control desk 5 – Keyboard (TSO) 6 – Foot control 7 – Tabletop movement 8 – Compressor group 9 – Spot Film Device – Cassette movement 10 – Spot Film Device – Shutters / Grid group 11 – Spot Film Device – Gripping group 12 – Spot Film Device – Cross division group 13 – Tabletop 14 – Collimator 15 – Covers 16 – Curved tabletop accessories 17 – Flat tabletop accessories (Rev. 3) 23-1 APOLLO .

R11 R10 S25 S26. S27 S28. S29 S30 CE version C-CSA-US version S31 S33 S44. 3) .I. R5. R6.7K Ball-microswitch Microswitch Ball-microswitch “Crouzet” microswitch XGG12-88Z1 UL/CSA microswitch “Crouzet” microswitch “Crouzet” microswitch Ball-microswitch Microswitch Microswitch UL/CSA microswitch “Crouzet” microswitch UL/CSA microswitch Note CE version C-CSA-US version M5 -M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M12 M13 M14 R2.SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 1 – ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Ref. S45 CE version C-CSA-US version CE version C-CSA-US version CE version C-CSA-US version S50 S51 4291308400 4291309100 APOLLO 23-2 (Rev. R7. R8. lift motor assy Tabletop movement motor Compressor motor assy Potentiometer 10K – 10gg Linear potentiometer 1. M2 Order code 6184420100 6184422100 6283310700 6283310300 6283310600 6283314900 6283317400 6283304400 6283331300 6284250100 6184613100 6284708800 4192005100 4192005200 4233103400 4208404000 4233104900 4291308800 4291309400 4291308400 4291307800 4233104900 4291309000 4208404000 4291309200 Description Angulation motor Angulation motor DX cassette movement motor with Encoder Encoder assy SX cassette movement motor Shutters motor assy Grid motor assy Gripping motor Cross division motor assy I.

3) S31 M14 R8 M7 M5 M12 S28 S29 R5 M8 R7 M6 R6 M9 S33 M10 R10 SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts S30 S27 M13 S50 S51 R11 23-3 M2 R2 APOLLO .S44 S45 S25 S26 (Rev.

S53 -- 4233104900 4233103400 4291308400 6684112000 APOLLO 23-4 (Rev. R3. R4.SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts Ref. S54. S47 S48. M1 Order code 4391106900 4391107900 Description Main beam actuator motor Main beam actuator motor Middle beam actuator motor Middle beam actuator motor Scan motor Scan motor SID motor Potentiometer 10K – 10gg “Crouzet” microswitch UL/CSA microswitch Ball-microswitch Ball-microswitch “Crouzet” microswitch Fuses kit Note CE version C-CSA-US version CE version C-CSA-US version CE version C-CSA-US version M3 4391106800 4391107800 M4 4391106700 4391107700 M11 R1. S49. S55 S52. 3) . R9 S32 6284413100 4192005100 4265712600 4291309300 CE version C-CSA-US version S46.

(Rev. 3) SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts R9 M11 S53 R4 S52 M4 S54 S55 R1 23-5 M1 S49 S32 M3 S48 R3 S46 S47 APOLLO .

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5. K7M. K9M K10M.SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 2 – ELECTRICAL CABINET and PCBs INSIDE THE TABLE Ref. K5M Order code 5883815000 5883815200 5883815400 5883815600 4492706800 5884815400 5884815000 5884815200 5884815600 4291512300 4291517300 Description CPU board A1 Input board A2 Output board A3 Spot Film Device motor drive board A4 Inverter Mitsubishi Filter board A7 Cabinat connector board A12 Compressor board A15 Additional Collimator Filters board A16 Power rele 24V 50/60Hz (4 NO + 1NO) K1L 3-phases power rele 24V 50/60Hz with filter (3 NO / 1 NC + 2 NC) K2M. V2. V3 3-phases screened transformer 6kVA 3-phases screened transformer 6kVA 1-phase transformer 140VA 1-phase transformer 560VA 1-phase transformer 590VA Spot Film Device board A10 Spot Film Device board A10 Base unit connector board A11 Angulation connector board A13 Table Top Control board A17 Note K6M. K7M.5uF 100ohm 160Vac Z34. V2. K8M. K9M Rele 2 contact 7A 24Vac K10M. 4) .3-10A Q1 Rectifier 25A 200V V1. K3M. K5M Power rele 24V 50/60Hz with filter (3 NO / 1 NC + 4 NC) K6M. K8M. K11M Rele socket 3-phases filter 440Vac – 10A 1-phase filter 0. K3M. K4M. K4M. Z35 Q1 V1. K11M -Z1 Z34. V3 T1 4291514200 4291505400 4571810600 4192211300 4192507100 4291511700 4165121100 4492821600 4492821700 CE version C-CSA-US version T2 T3 T4 A10 (*) 4492820900 4492821000 4492811100 5883301500 5884305400 5884105000 5884305200 5884614000 CE version C-CSA-US version A11 (*) A13 (*) A17 (*) (*) Inside Apollo table APOLLO 23-6 (Rev. A6 A7 A12 A15 A16 K1L K2M. Z35 3-phases breaker 6.

3) 23-7 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts (Rev.

10 Note APOLLO 23-8 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 3 – CONNECTION CABLES Ref. 3) . X0-X74 X0-X99 X0-X101 X8 X14 X16 X19 X20 X44 X45 X46 X68 X99 X105 10 Order code 6284821000 6284820900 6284820600 6284821400 6284820300 6284820400 6284820200 6284820700 6284820500 6284821300 6284820800 6284820100 6284821100 6284821200 6284821500 Description Emergency switch cable X0-X74 SID motor cable X0-X99 Emergency red button cable X0-X101 Console cable X8 SFD signal cable X14 TSO cable X16 SFD potentiometer cable X19 Table potentiometer cable X20 SFD power cable X44 Collimator cable X45 Board connection cable X46 SFD motor cable X68 Compressor motor cable X99 Board connection cable 105 Ground cable N.

SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 4 – CONTROL DESK 1 2 3 (7x) Ref. 3) 23-9 APOLLO . -1 2 3 -- Order code 8384800000 6684802300 6184801500 6684802400 5883815800 Description Control desk assy Policarbonate skin Joystick plate assy Knob for joystick (7x) Control desk CPU board A14 Note (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 5 – KEYBOARD (TSO) 1 2 Ref. 3) . -1 2 Order code 6284320600 5484305000 6684320400 Description Table Keyboard A8 assy Keyboard PCB Keyboard skin assy Note APOLLO 23-10 (Rev.

------ Order code 7184806000 4291419400 4291419500 6284806600 2300439200 Description Foot control assy Fluoro switch (2 microswitches) Exposure switch (4 microswitches) Connection cable Cable protection Note (Rev. 3) 23-11 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 6 – FOOT CONTROL Ref.

3) .SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 7 – TABLE TOP MOVEMENT 3 2 4 1 6 5 Ref. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Order code 4990806200 5284610400 5284610700 5284612000 6690806300 6184613600 Description Closed toothed belt 16 AT5/340 Toothed pulley AT5-Z26 Toothed pulley AT5-Z19 Toothed pulley M1-Z100 Open toothed belt 16 AT5 Belt pulley intermediate assy Note APOLLO 23-12 (Rev.

1 2 3 4 5 6 Order code 4990806200 5284612900 5284613000 5284611300 6690806300 6184613600 Description Closed toothed belt 16 AT5/340 Toothed pulley AT5-Z34 Toothed pulley AT5-Z26 Toothed pulley AT5-Z19 Open toothed belt 16 AT5 Belt pulley intermediate assy Note (Rev. 3) 23-13 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 4 1 3 2 5 6 Ref.

S27 S31 S30 R10 1 2 3 Order code 6284708800 4208404000 4291308400 4291308800 4192005200 2100262400 4890311000 6184704600 Description Compressor motor assy UP/DOWN switch Parking switch Compressor force switch Linear potentiometer 1.SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 8 – COMPRESSOR GROUP Ref. 3) . M14 S26.7K Compressor spring Cable chain Compressor cup assy Note APOLLO 23-14 (Rev.

3) 23-15 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts S31 M14 S26 R10 S27 S30 3 1 2 (Rev.

3) . movement Toothed belt T5x14 L=1920mm Sliding bar Closed toothed belt T5x12 L=600mm Rear pulley assy Driving toothed pulley Optical sensors with cable kit DX cassette movement motor with Encoder Encoder SX cassette movement motor Light receiver with cable Light emitter with cable Leaf spring assembly Note APOLLO 23-16 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 9 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – CASSETTE MOVEMENT Ref. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M5 -M6 8 9 10 Order code 6183309500 4990845400 5283308200 4990805700 6183309200 5283307700 6683310000 6683310700 6283310300 6283310600 6283323600 6283323700 5683321900 Description Tensioning pulley for cass.

3) 9 10 23-17 APOLLO 8 1 3 .SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 5 M5 6 7 4 M6 2 (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 10 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – SHUTTERS / GRID GROUP Ref. 3) . 1 2 3 M7 M8 -- Order code 4990806000 4990805900 4990805800 6283314900 6283317400 6690805500 Description Closed toothed belt T5x8 L=215mm Closed toothed belt T5x10 L=200mm Closed toothed belt T5x10 L=220mm Shutters motor assy Grid motor assy Open toothed belt kit T5x8 (gripping. shutters. grid) Note APOLLO 23-18 (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 1 3 2 (Rev. 3) M7 23-19 APOLLO M8 .

-M9 S33 R6 1 Order code 7183300000 6283304400 4291307800 4192005100 5783301200 Description Gripping assy Gripping motor assy Microswitch “Crouzet” Potentiometer 10K – 10gg Gripping spring Note APOLLO 23-20 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 11 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – GRIPPING GROUP R6 S33 1 M9 Ref. 3) .

3) 23-21 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 12 – SPOT FILM DEVICE – CROSS DIVISION GROUP 1 R7 M10 Ref. 1 M10 R7 Order code 4990805600 6283331300 4192005100 Description Closed toothed belt T5x10 L=840mm Cross division motor assy Potentiometer 10K – 10gg Note (Rev.

1 2 3 Order code 7184600600 7184600000 7184600700 Description Curved plastic tabletop Curved carbon fibre tabletop Flat plastic tabletop Note APOLLO 23-22 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 13 – TABLETOP Ref. 3) .

-1 2 3 4 5 -- Order code 8611005100 5811227000 4591606700 4192004000 4391103000 5911310900 8611005000 Description Automatic collimator Push button collimator panel board Halogen lamp 24V 100W Potentiometer 10k – 3gg Collimator motor 24V Collimator plexiglas cover Iris collimator Note (Rev. 3) 23-23 APOLLO .SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 14 – COLLIMATOR Ref.

lift only APOLLO 23-24 (Rev.I. g2 h i l1 l2 m n1 n2 o p 5484500700 6184508100 6184508000 6184506900 5684504000 5484508200 5484503200 5484501400 5684502700 5684502800 6184505400 5684434700 5684434800 5484434600 6184506400 with I. 3) . a Order code 6184507200 6184507300 Description SFD upper cover SFD upper cover SFD front cover SFD left lateral cover SFD right lateral cover SFD lower cover Base front cover Scanning cover Base left/right lateral cover Tabletop support arm front cover Scanning left rear cover Scanning right rear cover Angulation cover X-ray tube left lower cover X-ray tube right lower cover X-ray tube main cover I. lift cover Note CE version C-CSA-US version b c d e f g1.SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 15 – COVERS Ref.I.

3) a c e 23-25 APOLLO d p m f .SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts g1 g2 g n1 n2 n i h o l1 l2 l i b (Rev.

q r s t u1 u2 v1 v2 w z Order code 5484500100 5484500300 5484502600 5484502500 5684502700 5684502800 5684504300 5684504200 5684232300 5684108200 Description SID rear cover Column rear cover Rear cables junction upper cover Rear cables junction lower cover Scanning rear left cover Scanning rear right cover Base left rear cover Base right rear cover Cables chains junction bracket Cables output cover Note APOLLO 23-26 (Rev.SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts Ref. 3) .

SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts v v2 r s q w t z u2 (Rev. 3) u 23-27 APOLLO u1 v1 .

3) .SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 16 – CURVED TABLETOP ACCESSORIES 1 3 2 6 4 5 Ref. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Order code 7184621100 6184623000 7184622900 7184623200 7184624300 7184626200 Description Headrest Patient support handgrip (1 pc.) Block patient footrest Legrest (2 pcs.) Band-tensioner with compression band Lateral cassette holder Note APOLLO 23-28 (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts 17 – FLAT TABLETOP ACCESSORIES 1 2 3 6 4 5 Ref. 3) 23-29 APOLLO .) Block patient footrest Unblocked footrest kit (2x) Legrest (2 pcs. 1 2 3 -4 5 6 Order code 7173150000 6173120000 7173150000 6673145900 8173142500 7173129000 7173115000 Description Headrest Patient support handgrip (1 pc.) Band-tensioner with compression band Lateral cassette holder Note (Rev.

SERVICE MANUAL Spare Parts THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APOLLO 23-30 (Rev. 3) .

(+39) 02 48859.p. 3 20090 Buccinasco (MI) Italy Tel.Code 6984900703_Rev. Via Delle Azalee.4 0051 Villa Sistemi Medicali S.A.1 Fax (+39) 02 4881844 .

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->